CD RECEIVER

RECEPTOR CON CD

RECEPTEUR CD

KD-AR770/KD-G720

KD-AR770/KD-G720

KD-AR770/KD-G720

FRAN??AIS ESPA??OL ENGLISH

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 8.

Para cancelar la demostraci??n en pantalla, consulte la p??gina 8.

Pour annuler la d??monstration des affichages, r??f??rez-vous ?? la page 8.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual. Para la instalaci??n y las conexiones, refi??rase al manual separado. Pour l???installation et les raccordements, se r??f??rer au manuel s??par??.

INSTRUCTIONS

MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES

MANUEL D???INSTRUCTIONS

For customer Use:

Enter below the Model No. and Serial No. which are located on the top or bottom of the cabinet. Retain this information for future reference.

Model No.

Serial No.

GET0354-001A

[J]

CD RECEIVER

KD-G725

KD-G725

ENGLISH

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.

6

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

INSTRUCTIONS

GET0355-005A

[UT]

ENGLISH

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1.CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2.CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.

3.CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.

4.REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

How to reset your unit

Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc

???PLEASE??? and ???EJECT??? appear alternately on the display.

???If this does not work, reset your unit.

???Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.

Warning:

If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved in a traffic accident.

How to use the MODE button

If you press MODE, the unit goes into functions mode, then the number buttons and 5/??? buttons work as different function buttons.

Ex.: When number button 2 works as MO (monaural) button.

Time countdown indicator

To use these buttons for their original

functions again after pressing MODE, wait for 5 seconds without pressing any of these buttons until the functions mode is cleared or press MODE again.

For safety...

???Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.

???Stop the car before performing any complicated operations.

Temperature inside the car...

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes normal before operating the unit.

2

How to read this manual

???Button operations are mainly explained with the illustrations in the table below.

???Some related tips and notes are explained in ???More about this unit??? (see pages 18 ??? 21).

Press briefly.

Press repeatedly.

Press either one.

Press and hold until your desired response begins.

Press and hold both buttons at the same time.

The following marks are used to indicate...

: Built-in CD player operations.

: External CD changer operations. : External USB memory operations.

:Indicator displayed for the corresponding operation.

ENGLISH

How to detach/attach the control panel

Detaching...Attaching...

Lever

CAUTION:

The lever comes out if you pressed the 0 button while the panel is detached. If this happens, push the lever back into lock position before attaching the panel.

3

ENGLISH

Control panel

Parts identification

Display window

1 BAND button

2??? Control dial

???(standby/on attenuator) button 3 DISP (display) button

4 Remote sensor

???DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).

5 Display window

6 5(up) / ???(down) buttons

7 EQ (equalizer) button

8 0(eject) button

9 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal p SRC (source) button

q (control panel release) button w SEL (select) button

e MODE button

r MO (monaural) button

tSSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button

y Number buttons u RPT (repeat) button

i RND (random) button o 4/?? buttons

Display window

; Track information indicators???TAG (ID3 Tag), (track/file), (folder)

aTuner reception indicators???ST (stereo), MO (monaural)

s Main display

d Tr (track) indicator

f LOUD (loudness) indicator

g Source display / Volume level indicator h Playback mode / item indicators???

RND (random), (disc),(folder), RPT (repeat)

j Track type indicators*???WMA, MP3

kPlayback source indicators*???

CH: Lights up only when CD-CH is selected as the playback source.

DISC: Lights up for the built-in CD player. l EQ (equalizer) indicator

/Sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer) indicators???USER, ROCK, CLASSIC,

POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ

??? also works as the time countdown indicator and level meter during play (see page 13).

* lights up for the selected item.

4

Installing the lithium coin battery (CR2025)

ENGLISH

Aim the remote controller directly at the remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle in between.

Warning:

???Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.

???Store the battery in a place where children cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.

???To prevent the battery from over-heating, cracking, or starting a fire:

???Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.

???Do not leave the battery with other metallic materials.

???Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar tools.

???Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when throwing away or saving it.

Caution:

1 (standby/on/attenuator) button

???Turns the power on if pressed briefly or attenuates the sound when power is on.

???Turns the power off if pressed and held. 2 5U (up) / D (down) ???buttons

???Changes the FM/AM bands with 5U.

???Changes the preset stations with D ???.

???Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA/ USB.

???While playing an MP3 disc on an MP3-compatible CD changer:

???Changes the disc if pressed briefly.

???Changes the folder if pressed and held.

???While listening to an Apple iPod?? or a JVC D. player:

???Pauses/stops or resumes playback with D ???.

???Enter the main menu with 5U. (Now 5U/D ???/2R/F 3work as the

menu selecting buttons.)*

3VOL ??? / VOL + buttons

???Adjusts the volume level. 4 SOUND button

???Selects the sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer).

5SOURCE button

??? Selects the source.

*5U : Returns to the previous menu.

D ??? : Confirms the selection.

Continued on the next page...

5

ENGLISH

62 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons

???Searches for stations if pressed briefly.

???Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and held.

???Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.

???While listening to an iPod or a D. player (in menu selecting mode):

???Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press D ??? to confirm the selection.)

???Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.

@Adjust the sound as you want. (See page 12.)

Caution on volume setting:

Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.

Getting started

Basic operations

~ Turn on the power.

??

*You cannot select these sources if they are not ready or not connected.

!For FM/AM tuner

??? Adjust the volume.

Volume level appears.

Volume level indicator

To drop the volume in a moment (ATT)

To restore the sound, press it again.

To turn off the power

Basic settings

???See also ???General settings ??? PSM??? on pages 13 and 14.

1

2

1 Canceling the display demonstrations

Select ???DEMO,??? then ???DEMO OFF.???

2Setting the clock

Select ???CLOCK H??? (hour), then adjust the hour.

Select ???CLOCK M??? (minute), then adjust the minute.

6

3 Finish the procedure.

To check the current clock time while the power is turned off

To check other information while listening to the radio

Clock =Station name*

=Frequency =(back to the beginning)

*FM/AM: If no name is assigned to a station, ???NO NAME??? appears. To assign a title to a station, see page 15.

To tune in to a station manually

In step ! on the left...

1

2 Select a desired station frequency.

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive

ENGLISH

Radio operations

~

Lights up when monaural mode is activated.

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure. ???MONO OFF??? appears and the MO indicator goes off.

Lights up when receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength.

Selected band appears.

!Start searching for a station.

When a station is received, searching stops.

To stop searching, press the same button again.

Storing stations in memory

You can preset six stations for each band.

FM station automatic presetting??? SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)

1Select the FM band (FM1 ??? FM3) you want to store into.

2

7

ENGLISH

3

???SSM??? appears, then disappears when automatic presetting is over.

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are searched and stored automatically in the FM band.

Manual presetting

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number 4 of the FM1 band.

1

2

Disc/USB memory operations

Playing a disc in the unit

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.

To stop play and eject the disc

Playing discs in the CD changer

All discs in the magazine will be played repeatedly until you change the source.

??? Ejecting the magazine will also stop playing.

~

Listening to a preset station

1

2Select the preset station (1 ??? 6) you want.

or

*If you have changed the external input setting to ???EXT IN??? (see page 14), you cannot select the CD changer.

??Select a disc.

For disc number from 01 ??? 06:

For disc number from 07 ??? 12:

8

Playing from a USB memory

This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a USB memory.

All tracks in the USB memory will be played repeatedly until you change the source.

???Removing the USB memory will also stop playback.

~

USB memory

If a USB memory has been attached...

About MP3 and WMA tracks

MP3 and WMA ???tracks??? (words ???file??? and ???track??? are used interchangeably) are recorded in ???folders.???

About the CD changer

It is recommended to use a JVC MP3- compatible CD changer with your unit.

???You can also connect MP3-incompatible CD changers. However, these units are not compatible with MP3 discs.

???You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.

???You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD changer.

???Disc text information recorded in the CD Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text compatible CD changer is connected.

???For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume).

To fast-forward or reverse the track

ENGLISH

To go to the next or previous tracks

Playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.

???If a different USB memory is currently attached, playback starts from the beginning.

To detach the USB memory, straightly pull it out from the unit.

Cautions:

???Avoid using the USB memory if it might hinder your safety driving.

???Make sure all important data has been backed up to avoid losing the data.

Continued on the next page...

9

ENGLISH

To go to the next or previous folders (only for MP3/WMA/USB)

For MP3 tracks: For WMA tracks:

Other main functions

Skipping tracks quickly during play

Only possible on JVC

MP3-compatible CD changer

To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder (for MP3/WMA/USB) directly

To select a number from 01 ??? 06:

To select a number from 07 ??? 12:

???To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA/ USB, it is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their folder names???01, 02, 03, and so on.

To select a particular track in a folder (for MP3/WMA/USB):

???For MP3/WMA/USB, you can skip tracks within the same folder.

Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track whose number is a single digit (1 to 9)

1

2

Each time you press the button, you can skip 10 tracks.

???After the last track, the first track will be selected and vice versa.

3

Prohibiting disc ejection

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure.

10

You can use only one of the following playback modes at a time.

1

While playing an audio CD or a CD Text

2 Select your desired playback mode.

7 Repeat play

ENGLISH

While playing an MP3/WMA*2 disc or

USB memory

???When ???TAG DISP??? is set to ???TAG ON??? (see page 14)

???When ???TAG DISP??? is set to ???TAG OFF???

: Clock with the current track number

: Elapsed playing time with the current track number

*1 If the current disc is an audio CD, ???NO NAME??? appears.

*2 Only for the built-in CD player and external USB memory.

*3 If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information, folder name and file name appear. In this case, the TAG indicator will not light up.

TRK RPT : The current track.

FLDR RPT*4 : All tracks of the current folder.

DISC RPT*5 : All tracks of the current disc.

RPT OFF : Cancels.

7 Random play

Mode Plays at random

FLDR RND*4 : All tracks of the current folder, then tracks of the next folder and so on.

*4 Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/ USB).

*5 Only while playing discs in the CD changer.

11

Sound adjustments

Adjusting the sound

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your preference.

1

2

Indication pattern changes as you adjust the level.

Ex.: When ???TRE??? is selected

Indication [Range]

BAS*1 (bass)

Adjust the bass. [???06 to +06]

TRE*1 (treble)

Adjust the treble. [???06 to +06]

FAD*2 (fader)

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance. [R06 to F06]

BAL*3 (balance)

Adjust the left and right speaker balance. [L06 to R06]

LOUD*1 (loudness)

Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced sound at low volume level. [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]

SUB.W*4 (subwoofer)

Adjust the subwoofer output level. [00 to 08]

VOL (volume)

Adjust the volume. [00 to 30 or 50*5]

*1 When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness, the adjustment you have made is stored for the currently selected sound mode (C-EQ) including ???USER.???

*2 If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to ???00.???

*3 This adjustment cannot affect the subwoofer output.

*4 This takes effect only when a subwoofer is connected.

*5 Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See page 14 for details.)

12

General settings ??? PSM

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items listed in the table that follows.

2 Select a PSM item.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other PSM items if necessary.

5 Finish the procedure.

ENGLISH

Ex.: When ???DIMMER??? is selected

??? Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the setting.

Continued on the next page...

13

ENGLISH

*1 Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display. *2 Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected???FM, AM, CD or USB.

14

You can assign titles to station frequencies and

CDs (both in this unit and the CD changer).

ENGLISH

*You cannot assign a title to a CD Text or an MP3/WMA disc or a USB memory.

1Select the sources.

???For FM/AM tuner: Select a station.

???For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.

???For CDs in the CD changer: Select ???CD-CH,??? then select a disc number.

2 Enter the title assignment mode.

Ex.: When you select ???CD??? as the source

3Assign a title.

1 Select a character.

3Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish entering the title.

4 Finish the procedure.

To erase the entire title

In step 2 on the left...

15

iPod??/D. player operations

???Adjust the sound as you want. (See page 12.)

??? Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or D. player is deactivated.

To pause*1 or stop*2 playback

To resume playback, press it again.

To fast-forward or reverse the track

To go to the next or previous tracks

*1 For iPod

*2 For D. player

Selecting a track from the menu

1 Enter the main menu.

Now the 5/???/ 4/??buttons work as the menu selecting buttons*3.

2 Select the desired menu.

For iPod:

PLAYLIST ??ARTISTS ??ALBUMS ??SONGS ??GENRES ??COMPOSER ??(back to the

beginning)

For D. player:

PLAYLIST ??ARTIST ??ALBUM ??GENRE

??TRACK ??(back to the beginning)

16

3 Confirm the selection.

To move back to the previous menu, press 5.

???If a track is selected, playback starts automatically.

???If the selected item has another layer, you will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the desired track is played.

???Holding 4/?? can skip 10 items at a time.

*3 The menu selecting mode will be canceled:

???If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.

???When you confirm the selection of a track.

7 Random play

ALBM RND*4

Functions the same as ???Shuffle Albums??? of the iPod.

SONG RND/RND ON

Functions the same as ???Shuffle Songs??? of the iPod or ???Random Play =On??? of the D. player.

RND OFF

Cancels.

*4 For iPod: Only if you select ???ALL??? in ???ALBUMS??? of the main ???MENU.???

ENGLISH

Selecting the playback modes

1

2 Select your desired playback mode.

7 Repeat play

ONE RPT

Functions the same as ???Repeat One??? of the iPod or ???Repeat Mode =One??? for the D. player.

ALL RPT

Functions the same as ???Repeat All??? of the iPod or ???Repeat Mode =All??? for the D. player.

RPT OFF

Cancels.

To check other information while listening to an iPod or a D. player

17

If ???EXT IN??? does not appear, see page 14 and select the external input (???EXT IN???).

??Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

! Adjust the volume.

???Adjust the sound as you want. (See page 12.)

To check other information while listening to an external component

Clock ??EXT IN

More about this unit

Basic operations

Turning on the power

???By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.

Turning off the power

???If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc play will start from where playback has been stopped previously, next time you turn on the power.

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

???During SSM search...

???All previously stored stations are erased and stations are stored newly.

???Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).

???When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.

???When storing a station manually, the previously preset station is erased when a new station is stored in the same preset number.

Disc operations

Caution for DualDisc playback

???The Non-DVD side of a ???DualDisc??? does not comply with the ???Compact Disc Digital Audio??? standard. Therefore, the use of Non- DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may not be recommended.

General

???This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/ CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA formats.

Inserting a disc

???Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into the loading slot.

18

???When a disc is inserted upside down, ???PLEASE??? and ???EJECT??? appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to eject the disc.

Playing a disc

???While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

???Use only ???finalized??? CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

???This unit can play back only files of the same type which are first detected if a disc includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/ WMA files.

???This unit can play back multi-session discs; however, unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.

???Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the following reasons:

???Discs are dirty or scratched.

???Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside the unit.

???The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

???CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with ???Packet Write??? method.

???There are improper recording conditions (missing data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched, warped, etc.).

???CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.

???Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

???Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck to the surface.

???Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an ink jet printer.

Using these discs under high temperatures or high humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the unit.

Playing an MP3/WMA disc

???This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the letter case???upper/lower).

???This unit can show the names of albums, artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.

???This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other characters can be correctly displayed.

???This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the conditions below:

???Bit rate: 8 kbps ??? 320 kbps

???Sampling frequency:

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1) 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)

???Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name

???The maximum number of characters for file/ folder names vary among the disc format used (includes 4 extension characters???<.mp3> or <.wma>).

???ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

???ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

???Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters

???Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters

???Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72)

characters

*The parenthetic figure is the maximum number of characters for file/folder names in case the total number of files and folders is 313 or more.

???This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time. Especially, after performing the search function, this difference becomes noticeable.

???This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.

???This unit cannot play back the following files:

??? MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.

??? MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.

??? MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

??? WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and voice format.

??? WMA files which are not based upon Windows Media?? Audio.

Continued on the next page...

ENGLISH

19

ENGLISH

???WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

???Files which have the data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.

???The search function works but search speed is not constant.

Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB memory

???While playing from a USB memory, the playback order may differ from other players.

???This unit may be unable to play back some USB memories or some files due to their characteristics or recording conditions.

???Depending on the shape of the USB memories and connection ports, some USB memories may not be attached properly or the connection might be loose.

???It is not recommended to use a USB memory wider than 20 mm as it will block you from pressing the 0 button.

???If the connected USB memory does not have the correct files, ???NO FILES??? appears and the unit returns to the previous source.

???This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.

???This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the conditions below:

???Bit rate:

MP3: 32 kbps ??? 320 kbps (MPEG-1)

8 kbps ??? 160 kbps (MPEG-2/2.5) WMA:5 kbps ??? 320 kbps

???Sampling frequency:

MP3: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, (MPEG-1) 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz, (MPEG-2) 12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz, (MPEG- 2.5)

WMA:8 kHz ??? 48 kHz

???This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in VBR (variable bit rate).

???The maximum number of characters for folder and file names is 25 characters; 128 characters for MP3/WMA tag information.

???This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files and 250 folders (999 files per folder).

???This unit cannot play back the following files:

???MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.

???MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.

???MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

Changing the source

???If you change the source, playback also stops. Next time you select the same source again, playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.

Ejecting a disc

???If the ejected disc is not removed within

15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted again into the loading slot to protect it from dust. (Disc will not play this time.)

General settings???PSM

??????AUTO??? setting for ???DIMMER??? may not work correctly on some vehicles, particularly on those having a control dial for dimming. In this case, change the ???DIMMER??? setting to any other than ???AUTO.???

???If you change the ???AMP GAIN??? setting from ???HIGH PWR??? to ???LOW PWR??? while the volume level is set higher than ???VOL 30,??? the unit automatically changes the volume level to ???VOL 30.???

Title assignment

???If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station frequencies or 30 discs, ???NAMEFULL??? appears. Delete unwanted titles before assignment.

???Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can also be shown if you play back the disc from the unit and vice versa.

iPod?? or D. player operations

???When you turn on this unit, the iPod or

D.player is charged through this unit.

???While the iPod or D. player is connected to this unit, all operations from the iPod or

D.player are disabled. Perform all operations from this unit.

???The text information may not be displayed correctly.

??? Some characters such as accented letters cannot be shown correctly on the display.

20

???Depends on the condition of communication between the iPod or D. player and the unit.

???If the text information includes more than 8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see also page 13). This unit can display up to 40 characters.

Notice:

When operating an iPod or a D. player, some operations may not be performed correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the following JVC web site:

For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/ english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>

For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/ english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>

ENGLISH

Maintenance

How to clean the connectors

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.

Connector

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the CD player in the following cases:

???After starting the heater in the car.

???If it becomes very humid inside the car. Should this occur, the CD player may malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until the moisture evaporates.

How to handle discs

???Always hold the disc by the

edges. Do not touch its recording surface.

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the disc around the center holder (with the printed surface facing up).

???Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.

To keep discs clean

A dirty disc may not play correctly. If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to edge.

???Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean discs.

To play new discs

New discs may have some rough spots around the inner and outer edges. If such a disc is used, this unit may reject the disc.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Do not use the following discs:

Warped disc

21

ENGLISH

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.

22

MP3/WMA playback

USB memory playback

ENGLISH

Continued on the next page...

23

iPod/D. player playback

???Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

???iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

24

Specifications

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION

Maximum Power Output: Front: 50 W per channel Rear: 50 W per channel

Continuous Power Output (RMS):

Front: 19 W per channel into 4 ???, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion.

Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 ???, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion.

Load Impedance: 4 ??? (4 ??? to 8 ??? allowance) Tone Control Range:

Bass: ??10 dB at 100 Hz

Treble: ??10 dB at 10 kHz Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB

Line-Out Level/Impedance:

2.5 V/20 k??? load (full scale) Output Impedance: 1 k??? Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:

2.0 V/20 k??? load (full scale) Other Terminal: CD changer

TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range:

FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz

[FM Tuner]

Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 ??V/75 ???) 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

16.3 dBf (1.8 ??V/75 ???)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

Stereo Separation: 30 dB

[AM Tuner]

Sensitivity: 20 ??V

Selectivity: 35 dB

CD PLAYER/USB MEMORY SECTION

Type: Compact disc player

Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)

Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit MP3 Decoding Format:

MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3 Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps

WMA (Windows Media?? Audio) Decoding Format:

Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps Playable USB memory:

Format: FAT 12/16/32

Storage: Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)

Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA

Max. Current: Less than 500 mA

GENERAL

Power Requirement: Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance) Grounding System: Negative ground Allowable Operating Temperature:

0??C to +40??C Dimensions (W ?? H ?? D):

Installation Size (approx.):

182 mm ?? 52 mm ?? 152 mm Panel Size (approx.):

188 mm ?? 58 mm ?? 11 mm Mass (approx.):

1.4 kg (excluding accessories)

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

ENGLISH

25

Having TROUBLE with operation?

Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

WARNINGS

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery???s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before installing the unit.

??? Be sure to ground this unit to the car???s chassis again after installation.

Notes:

???Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio dealers.

???It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 ??? to 8 ???). If the maximum power is less than

50 W, change ???AMP GAIN??? setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 14 of the

INSTRUCTIONS).

???To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.

???The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.

Heat sink

???BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.

Parts list for installation and connection

1

Do the required electrical connections.

*1 When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.

*1

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the sleeve firmly in place.

Removing the unit

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.

Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated so that the unit can be removed.

When using the optional stay /

When installing the unit without using the sleeve /

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.

Dashboard

Screw (option)

 

(TOYOTA) 

Flat type screws (M5 ??? 8 mm)*2 (M5 ??? 8 mm)*2

Bracket*2

*2

Pocket

Bracket*2

*2

*2 Not supplied for this unit.

*2

Flat type screws (M5 ??? 8 mm)*2 (M5 ??? 8 mm)*2

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30??. 30??

TROUBLESHOOTING

??? The fuse blows.

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

???Power cannot be turned on.

* Is the yellow lead connected?

???No sound from the speakers.

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

??? Sound is distorted.

*Is the speaker output lead grounded?

*Are the ????????? terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

??? Noise interfere with sounds.

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car???s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?

??? This unit becomes hot.

*Is the speaker output lead grounded?

*Are the ????????? terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

??? This unit does not work at all.

* Have you reset your unit?

2

ENGLISH

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A Typical connections /

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.

1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.

2 Connect the antenna cord.

3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

!

1

2

3

15 A fuse

15 A

Rear ground terminal

Yellow *2

*2

*1 Not supplied for this unit.

*1

To metallic body or chassis of the car

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

Ignition switch

*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.

*2



Red

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

Blue

To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)

  250 mA

Blue with white stripe

To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)  200 mA 

Orange with white stripe

To car light control switch

Brown

To cellular phone system

Fuse block

3

B Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer

Rear speakers

JVC Amplifier

JVC

Front speakers

Front speakers

JVC Amplifier

JVC

*4 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

JVC Amplifier

JVC

Subwoofer

*3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car???to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.

*3





C Connecting the external components /

CAUTION /

??? Before connecting the external components , make sure that the unit is turned off.

???

or

JVC CD changer

JVC CD

CD changer jack

CD

*5 iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

*5 iPod Apple Computer, Inc.

Apple iPod (separately purchased)

Apple iPod  

JVC D. player (separately purchased)

JVC D. player  

*6 Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer *6 CD

Other external component /

CD changer jack

CD

External component

External component

4

ENGLISH

INFORMATION (For U.S.A.)

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there

is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

???Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

???Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

???Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

???Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/ TV technician for help.

Caution:

Changes or modifications not approved by JVC could void the user???s authority to operate the equipment.

How to reset your unit

??? Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc

???PLEASE??? and ???EJECT??? appear alternately on the display.

???If this does not work, reset your unit.

???Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.

How to use the MODE button

If you press MODE, the unit goes into functions mode, then the number buttons and 5/??? buttons work as different function buttons.

Ex.: When number button 2 works as MO (monaural) button.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1.CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2.CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.

3.CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.

Time countdown indicator

To use these buttons for their original functions again after pressing MODE, wait for

5 seconds without pressing any of these buttons until the functions mode is cleared or press MODE again.

2

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product. Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best possible performance from the unit.

How to read this manual

???Button operations are mainly explained with the illustrations in the table below.

???Some related tips and notes are explained in ???More about this unit??? (see pages 23 ??? 26).

Press briefly.

Press repeatedly.

Press either one.

Press and hold until your desired response begins.

Press and hold both buttons at the same time.

The following marks are used to indicate...

: Built-in CD player operations.

: External CD changer operations. : External USB memory operations.

:Indicator displayed for the corresponding operation.

Warning:

If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved in a traffic accident.

CONTENTS

For safety...

???Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.

???Stop the car before performing any complicated operations.

Temperature inside the car...

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes normal before operating the unit.

3

ENGLISH

Control panel ??? KD-AR770 and KD-G720

Parts identification

1 BAND button

2??? Control dial

???(standby/on attenuator) button 3 DISP (display) button

4 Remote sensor

???DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light (direct sunlight or artificial

lighting).

5 Display window

6 5(up) / ???(down) buttons

7 EQ (equalizer) button

8 0(eject) button

9 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal p SRC (source) button

q (control panel release) button w SEL (select) button

e MODE button

r MO (monaural) button

t SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button

y Number buttons

u RPT (repeat) button i RND (random) button o 4/??buttons

How to detach/attach the control panel

Detaching...Attaching...

Lever

CAUTION:

The lever comes out if you pressed the 0button while the panel is detached. If this happens, push the lever back into lock position before attaching the panel.

4

Display window

ENGLISH

; Track information indicators???TAG (ID3 Tag), (track/file), (folder)

a Tuner reception indicators???ST (stereo), MO (monaural)

s Main display

d Tr (track) indicator

f LOUD (loudness) indicator

g Source display / Volume level indicator

hPlayback mode / item indicators??? RND (random), (disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)

j Track type indicators*???WMA, MP3 k Playback source indicators*???CH (CD changer), DISC (built-in CD player)

l EQ (equalizer) indicator

/Sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer) indicators???USER, ROCK, CLASSIC,

POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ

???also works as the time countdown indicator and level meter during play (see page 15).

* lights up for the selected item.

Remote controller ??? RM-RK50

Aim the remote controller directly at the remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle in between.

Continued on the next page

5

Warning:

Main elements and features

1 (standby/on/attenuator) button

???Turns the power on if pressed briefly or attenuates the sound when the power is on.

???Turns the power off if pressed and held. 2 5U (up) / D (down) ???buttons

???Changes the FM/AM bands with 5U.

???Changes the preset stations with D ???.

???Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA/ USB.

???While playing an MP3 disc on an MP3-compatible CD changer:

???Changes the disc if pressed briefly.

???Changes the folder if pressed and held.

???While listening to the satellite (SIRIUS or XM) radio:

???Changes the categories.

???While listening to an Apple iPod?? or a JVC D. player:

???Pauses/stops or resumes playback with D ???.

???Enters the main menu with 5U. (Now 5U/D ???/2R/F 3work as the menu selecting buttons.)*

3VOL ??? / VOL + buttons

???Adjusts the volume level. 4 SOUND button

???Selects the sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer).

5SOURCE button

??? Selects the source.

62R (reverse) / F (forward) 3buttons

???Searches for stations if pressed briefly.

???Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and held.

???Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.

???While listening to the satellite radio:

???Changes the channels if pressed briefly.

???Changes the channels rapidly if pressed and held.

???While listening to an iPod or a D. player (in menu selecting mode):

???Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press D ???to confirm the selection.)

???Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.

*5U : Returns to the previous menu.

D ??? : Confirms the selection.

6

Getting started

Basic operations

~ Turn on the power.

??

*1 You cannot select these sources if they are not ready or not connected.

*2 Only for KD-AR770.

!

For FM/AM tuner

For SIRIUS radio

For XM radio

??? Adjust the volume.

Volume level appears.

Volume level indicator

@Adjust the sound as you want. (See pages 13 and 14.)

Caution on volume setting:

Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.

To drop the volume in a moment (ATT)

To restore the sound, press it again.

To turn off the power

ENGLISH

7

ENGLISH

Basic settingsRadio operations

??? See also ???General settings ??? PSM??? on pages

1 Canceling the display demonstrations

Select ???DEMO,??? then ???DEMO OFF.???

2Setting the clock

Select ???CLOCK H??? (hour), then adjust the hour.

Select ???CLOCK M??? (minute), then adjust the minute.

3 Finish the procedure.

To check the current clock time while the power is turned off

Lights up when receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength.

Selected band appears.

!Start searching for a station.

When a station is received, searching stops.

To stop searching, press the same button again.

To tune in to a station manually

In step ! above...

1

2 Select a desired station frequency.

8

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive

Lights up when monaural mode is activated.

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure. ???MONO OFF??? appears and the MO indicator goes off.

Manual presetting

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number 4 of the FM1 band.

1

2

ENGLISH

Storing stations in memory

You can preset six stations for each band.

FM station automatic presetting??? SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)

1Select the FM band (FM1 ??? FM3) you want to store into.

Listening to a preset station

1

2Select the preset station (1 ??? 6) you want.

or

2

3

???SSM??? appears, then disappears when automatic presetting is over.

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are searched and stored automatically in the FM band.

To check other information while listening to the radio

Clock =Station name* =

Frequency =(back to the beginning)

*If no name is assigned to a station,

???NO NAME??? appears. To assign a name to a station, see page 17.

9

ENGLISH

Disc/USB memory operations

Playing a disc in the unit

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.

Playing from a USB memory

This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a USB memory.

All tracks in the USB memory will be played repeatedly until you change the source.

???Removing the USB memory will also stop playback.

~

USB input terminal

Playing discs in the CD changer

All discs in the magazine will be played repeatedly until you change the source.

??? Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.

~

* If you have changed the external input setting to ???EXT IN??? (see page 16), you cannot select the CD changer.

??Select a disc.

For disc number from 01 ??? 06:

USB memory

If a USB memory has been attached...

Playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.

???If a different USB memory is currently attached, playback starts from the beginning.

To detach the USB memory, straightly pull it out from the unit.

For disc number from 07 ??? 12:

Cautions:

???Avoid using the USB memory if it might hinder your safety driving.

???Make sure all important data has been backed up to avoid losing the data.

10

About MP3 and WMA tracks

MP3 and WMA ???tracks??? (words ???file??? and ???track??? are used interchangeably) are recorded in ???folders.???

About the CD changer

It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.

???You can also connect MP3-incompatible CD changers. However, these units are not compatible with MP3 discs.

???You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.

???You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD changer.

???Disc text information recorded in the CD Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text compatible CD changer is connected.

???For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume).

To fast-forward or reverse the track

To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder (for MP3/WMA/USB) directly

To select a number from 01 ??? 06:

To select a number from 07 ??? 12:

???To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA/ USB, it is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their folder names???01, 02, 03, and so on.

To select a particular track in a folder (for MP3/WMA/USB):

ENGLISH

To go to the next or previous tracks

To go to the next or previous folders (only for MP3/WMA/USB)

For MP3 tracks: For WMA tracks:

Other main functions

Skipping tracks quickly during play

Only possible on JVC

MP3-compatible CD changer

???For MP3/WMA/USB, you can skip tracks within the same folder.

Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track whose number is a single digit (1 to 9)

1

Continued on the next page

11

ENGLISH

2

Each time you press the button, you can skip 10 tracks.

???After the last track, the first track will be selected and vice versa.

3

Prohibiting disc ejection

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure.

Changing the display information

While playing an audio CD or a CD Text

While playing an MP3/WMA*2 disc or a

USB memory

???When ???TAG DISP??? is set to ???TAG ON??? (see page 16)

??? When ???TAG DISP??? is set to ???TAG OFF???

: Clock with the current track number

: Elapsed playing time with the current track number

*1 If the current disc is an audio CD, ???NO NAME??? appears.

*2 Only for the built-in CD player and external USB memory.

*3 If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information, folder name and file name appear. In this case, the TAG indicator will not light up.

12

Selecting the playback modes

You can use only one of the following playback modes at a time.

1

2Select your desired playback mode.

7 Repeat play

7 Random play

Sound adjustments

*1 Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/ USB).

*2 Only while playing discs in the CD changer.

Adjusting the sound

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your preference.

1

2

Indication pattern changes as you adjust the level.

Ex.: When ???TRE??? is selected

Continued on the next page

13

ENGLISH

Indication, [Range]

BAS*1 (bass), [???06 to +06]

Adjust the bass.

TRE*1 (treble), [???06 to +06]

Adjust the treble.

FAD*2 (fader), [R06 to F06]

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.

BAL*3 (balance), [L06 to R06]

Adjust the left and right speaker balance.

LOUD*1 (loudness), [LOUD ON or

LOUD OFF]

Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced sound at low volume level.

SUB. W*4 (subwoofer), [00 to 08]

Adjust the subwoofer output level.

VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50*5]

Adjust the volume.

*1 When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness, the adjustment you have made is stored for the currently selected sound mode (C-EQ) including ???USER.???

*2 If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to ???00.???

*3 This adjustment cannot affect the subwoofer output.

*4 This takes effect only when a subwoofer is connected.

*5 Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See page 16 for details.)

General settings ??? PSM

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items (except ???SID???) listed in the table that follows.

1

2 Select a PSM item.

Ex.: When you select ???DIMMER???

3 Adjust the PSM item selected.

4Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other PSM items if necessary.

5 Finish the procedure.

14

*1 Displayed only when SIRIUS Satellite radio or XM Satellite radio is connected. *2 Displayed only when ???CLK ADJ??? is set to ???AUTO.???

*3 Displayed only when SIRIUS Satellite radio is connected. *4 Only for KD-AR770.

*5 Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display. Continued on the next page

ENGLISH

15

ENGLISH

16

You can assign titles to station frequencies and

CDs (both in this unit and in the CD changer).

ENGLISH

*You cannot assign a title to a CD Text or an MP3/WMA disc or a USB memory.

1Select the sources.

???For FM/AM tuner: Select a station.

???For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.

???For CDs in the CD changer: Select ???CD-CH,??? then select a disc number.

2 Enter the title assignment mode.

Ex.: When ???CD??? is selected as the source

3Assign a title.

1 Select a character.

3Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish entering the title.

4 Finish the procedure.

To erase the entire title

In step 2 on the left...

17

ENGLISH

Satellite radio operations

This unit is satellite (SAT) Radio Ready??? compatible with both SIRIUS Satellite radio and XM Satellite radio.

Before operating your satellite radio:

???For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume).

???Refer also to the Instructions supplied with your SIRIUS Satellite radio or XM Satellite radio.

??????SIRIUS??? and the SIRIUS dog logo are registered trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.

???XM and its corresponding logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc.

??????SAT Radio,??? the SAT Radio logo and all related marks are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc., and XM Satellite Radio, Inc.

Listening to the satellite radio

Connect either one of the following (separately purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear of this unit.

???JVC SIRIUS radio DLP???Down Link Processor, for listening to the SIRIUS Satellite radio.

???XMDirectTM Universal Tuner Box???Using a JVC Smart Digital Adapter (XMDJVC100: not supplied), for listening to the XM Satellite radio.

GCI (Global Control Information) update:

???If channels are updated after subscription, updating starts automatically. ???UPDATING??? flashes and no sound can be heard.

???Update takes a few minutes to complete.

???During update, you cannot operate your satellite radio.

Activate your SIRIUS subscription after connection:

1

2

JVC DLP starts updating all the SIRIUS channels.

Once completed, JVC DLP tunes in to the preset channel, CH184.

3 Check your SIRIUS ID, see page 15.

4Contact SIRIUS on the internet at <http://activate.siriusradio.com/> to activate your subscription, or you can call SIRIUS toll-free at 1-888-539- SIRIUS (7474).

???SUB UPDT PRESS ANY KEY??? scrolls on the display once subscription has been completed.

Activate your XM subscription after connection:

???Only Channel 0, 1, and 247 are available before activation.

1

2

XMDirectTM Universal Tuner Box starts updating all the XM channels. ???Channel 1??? is tuned in automatically.

3Check your XM Satellite radio ID labelled on the casing of the

XMDirectTM Universal Tuner Box, or tune in to ???Channel 0??? (see page 20).

18

4Contact XM Satellite radio on the internet at <http://xmradio. com/activation/> to activate your subscription, or you can call 1-800- XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346).

Once completed, the unit tunes in to one of the available channels (Channel 4 or

Listening to the XM Satellite radio

1

ENGLISH

Listening to the SIRIUS Satellite radio

1

3 Select a channel for listening.

2

3Select a category.

You can tune in to all the channels of every category by selecting ???ALL.???

Selecting a particular category (SPORTS, ENTERTAINMENT, etc.) allows you to enjoy only the channels from the selected category.

4 Select a channel for listening.

Holding the button changes the channels rapidly.

???When changing the category or channel, invalid and unsubscribed channels are skipped.

Holding the button changes the channels rapidly.

Searching for category/channel

You can search for programs by category (Category Search) or channel number (Channel Search).

???In Category Search, you can tune in to the channels of the selected category. Category Search begins from the currently selected channel. The selected channel number flashes on the display.

???In Channel Search, you can tune in to all channels (including non-categorised channels).

1Select a category (Category Search).

???For Channel Search, skips this step.

Continued on the next page

19

2 Select a channel for listening.

Ex.: When you select ???COUNTRY??? for Category Search

If no operation is done for about

15 seconds, Category Search is canceled.

In Channel Search, channel name and channel number appear on the display during search.

???While searching, invalid and unsubscribed channels are skipped.

Checking the XM Satellite radio ID

While selecting ???XM1,??? ???XM2,??? or ???XM3,??? select ???Channel 0.???

The display alternately shows ???RADIO ID??? and the 8-digit (alphanumeric) ID number.

To cancel the ID number display, select any

channel other than ???Channel 0.???

Storing channels in memory

You can preset six channels for each band.

Ex.: Storing a channel into preset number 4.

Listening to a preset channel

1Select either SIRIUS Satellite radio or XM Satellite radio.

2

3Select the preset channel (1 ??? 6) you want.

To change the display information while listening to a channel

Clock =Category name =Channel name =Artist name =Composer name* =Song/program name/ title =(back to the beginning)

* Only for SIRIUS Satellite radio.

20

iPod??/D. player operations

This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod or a JVC D. player from the control panel.

Before operating your iPod or D. player: Connect either one of the following (separately purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear of this unit.

???Interface adapter for iPod?????KS-PD100 for controlling an iPod.

???D. player interface adapter???KS-PD500 for controlling a D. player.

???For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume).

???For details, refer also to the manual supplied with the interface adapter.

Caution:

Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the vehicle???s ignition switch before connecting or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.

Preparations:

Make sure ???CHANGER??? is selected for the external input setting, see page 16.

~

??

! Adjust the volume.

ENGLISH

???Adjust the sound as you want. (See pages 13 and 14.)

??? Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or D. player is deactivated.

To pause*1 or stop*2 playback

To resume playback, press it again.

To fast-forward or reverse the track

To go to the next or previous tracks

*1 For iPod

*2 For D. player

Playback starts automatically from where it has been paused*1 or stopped*2 previously.

21

ENGLISH

Selecting a track from the menu

1 Enter the main menu.

Now the 5/???/ 4/?? buttons work as the menu selecting buttons*1.

*1 The menu selecting mode will be canceled:

???If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.

???When you confirm the selection of a track.

2 Select the desired menu.

For iPod:

PLAYLIST ??ARTISTS ??ALBUMS ??SONGS ??GENRES ??COMPOSER ??(back to the

beginning)

For D. player:

PLAYLIST ??ARTIST ??ALBUM ??GENRE

??TRACK ??(back to the beginning)

3 Confirm the selection.

To move back to the previous menu, press 5.

???If a track is selected, playback starts automatically.

???If the selected item has another layer, you will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the desired track is played.

???Holding4/??can skip 10 items at a time.

Selecting the playback modes

1

2 Select your desired playback mode.

7 Repeat play

ONE RPT

Functions the same as ???Repeat One??? of the iPod or ???Repeat Mode =One??? for the D. player.

ALL RPT

Functions the same as ???Repeat All??? of the iPod or ???Repeat Mode =All??? for the D. player.

RPT OFF

Cancels.

7 Random play

ALBM RND*2

Functions the same as ???Shuffle Albums??? of the iPod.

SONG RND/RND ON

Functions the same as ???Shuffle Songs??? of the iPod or ???Random Play =On??? of the D. player.

RND OFF

Cancels.

*2 For iPod: Only if you select ???ALL??? in ???ALBUMS??? of the main ???MENU.???

To check other information while listening to an iPod or a D. player

22

Other external component operations

You can connect an external component to the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input Adapter???KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX Input Adapter???KS-U58 (not supplied).

???For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume).

For listening to the USB memory, see pages 10 ??? 13; For Satellite radio, iPod, or D. player, see pages 18 ??? 22.

More about this unit

Basic operations

Turning on the power

???By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.

Turning off the power

???If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc play will start from where playback has been stopped previously, next time you turn on the power.

ENGLISH

~

If ???EXT IN??? does not appear, see page 16 and select the external input (???EXT IN???).

??Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

! Adjust the volume.

???Adjust the sound as you want. (See pages 13 and 14.)

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

???During SSM search...

???All previously stored stations are erased and stations are stored newly.

???Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).

???When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.

???When storing a station manually, the previously preset station is erased when a new station is stored in the same preset number.

Disc operations

Caution for DualDisc playback

???The Non-DVD side of a ???DualDisc??? does not comply with the ???Compact Disc Digital Audio??? standard. Therefore, the use of Non- DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may not be recommended.

To check other information while listening to an external component

Clock ??EXT IN

General

???This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/ CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA formats.

Continued on the next page

23

ENGLISH

Inserting a disc

???When a disc is inserted upside down, ???PLEASE??? and ???EJECT??? appear alternately on the display. Press 0to eject the disc.

???Do not insert 8 cm (3-3/16") discs (single CD) and unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into the loading slot.

Playing a disc

???While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

???Use only ???finalized??? CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

???This unit can play back only files of the same type which are first detected if a disc includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/ WMA files.

???This unit can play back multi-session discs; however, unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.

???Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the following reasons:

???Discs are dirty or scratched.

???Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside the unit.

???The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

???CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with ???Packet Write??? method.

???There are improper recording conditions (missing data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched, warped, etc.).

???CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.

???Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

???Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck to the surface.

???Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an ink jet printer.

Using these discs under high temperatures or high humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the unit.

Playing an MP3/WMA disc

???This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the letter case???upper/lower).

???This unit can show the names of albums, artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.

???This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other characters can be correctly displayed.

???This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the conditions below:

???Bit rate: 8 kbps ??? 320 kbps

???Sampling frequency:

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1) 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)

???Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name

???The maximum number of characters for file/ folder names vary among the disc format used (includes 4 extension characters???<.mp3> or <.wma>).

???ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

???ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

???Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters

???Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters

???Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72)

characters

*The parenthetic figure is the maximum number of characters for file/folder names in case the total number of files and folders is 313 or more.

???This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time. Especially, after performing the search function, this difference becomes noticeable.

???This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.

???This unit cannot play back the following files:

??? MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.

??? MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.

??? MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

24

???WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and voice format.

???WMA files which are not based upon Windows Media?? Audio.

???WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

???Files which have the data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.

???The search function works but search speed is not constant.

Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB memory

???While playing from a USB memory, the playback order may differ from other players.

???This unit may be unable to play back some USB memories or some files due to their characteristics or recording conditions.

???Depending on the shape of the USB memories and connection ports, some USB memories may not be attached properly or the connection might be loose.

???It is not recommended to use a USB memory wider than 20 mm as it will block you from pressing the 0 button.

???If the connected USB memory does not have the correct files, ???NO FILES??? appears and the unit returns to the previous source.

???This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.

???This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the conditions below:

???Bit rate:

MP3: 32 kbps ??? 320 kbps (MPEG-1)

8 kbps ??? 160 kbps (MPEG-2/2.5) WMA:5 kbps ??? 320 kbps

???Sampling frequency:

MP3: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, (MPEG-1) 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz, (MPEG-2) 12 kHz, 11.025 - 8 kHz, (MPEG-2.5)

WMA:8 kHz ??? 48 kHz

???This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in VBR (variable bit rate).

???The maximum number of characters for folder and file names is 25 characters; 128 characters for MP3/WMA tag information.

???This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files and 250 folders (999 files per folder).

???This unit cannot play back the following files:

???MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.

???MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.

???MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

Changing the source

???If you change the source, playback also stops. Next time you select the same source again, playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.

Ejecting a disc

???If the ejected disc is not removed within

15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted again into the loading slot to protect it from dust. (Disc will not play this time.)

General settings???PSM

??????AUTO??? setting for ???DIMMER??? may not work correctly on some vehicles, particularly on those having a control dial for dimming. In this case, change the ???DIMMER??? setting to any other than ???AUTO.???

???If you change the ???AMP GAIN??? setting from ???HIGH PWR??? to ???LOW PWR??? while the volume level is set higher than ???VOL 30,??? the unit automatically changes the volume level to ???VOL 30.???

Title assignment

???If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station frequencies or 30 discs, ???NAMEFULL??? appears. Delete unwanted titles before assignment.

???Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can also be shown if you play back the disc from the unit and vice versa.

Satellite radio operations

???You can also connect the JVC SIRIUS radio PnP (Plug and Play), using the JVC SIRIUS radio adapter, KS-U100K (not supplied) to the CD changer jack on the rear.

By turning on/off the power of the unit, you can turn on/off the JVC PnP. However, you cannot control it from this unit.

???To know more about SIRIUS Satellite radio or to sign up, visit ??http://www.sirius.com??.

???For the latest channel listings and programming information, or to sign up for XM Satellite radio, visit ??http://www.xmradio. com??.

Continued on the next page

ENGLISH

25

iPod?? or D. player operations

Maintenance

How to clean the connectors

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.

Connector

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the CD player in the following cases:

???After starting the heater in the car.

???If it becomes very humid inside the car. Should this occur, the CD player may malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until the moisture evaporates.

How to handle discs

???Always hold the disc by the

edges. Do not touch its recording surface.

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the disc around the center holder (with the printed surface facing up).

???Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.

To keep discs clean

A dirty disc may not play correctly. If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to edge.

???Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean discs.

To play new discs

New discs may have some rough spots around the inner and outer edges. If such a disc is used, this unit may reject the disc.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

26

Do not use the following discs:

Stick-on label

ENGLISH

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.

FM/AM General

Disc playback

MP3/WMA playback

???Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. ??? Stop playback while driving on rough roads.

???Change the disc.

???Check the cords and connections.

??? Disc cannot be played back. ??? Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.

???Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file names.

Continued on the next page

27

ENGLISH

MP3/WMA playback

USB memory playback

28

* NO CATEGORY, NO ARTIST, NO COMPOSER, and NO SONG/PROGRAM

ENGLISH

Continued on the next page

29

iPod/D. player playback

???Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

???iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

30

Specifications

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION

Load Impedance: 4 ??? (4 ??? to 8 ??? allowance) Tone Control Range:

Bass: ??10 dB at 100 Hz

Treble: ??10 dB at 10 kHz Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz Line-Out Level/Impedance:

KD-AR770: 4.0 V /20 k??? load (full scale)

KD-G720: 2.5 V /20 k??? load (full scale) Output Impedance: 1 k???

Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance: 2.0 V /20 k??? load (full scale)

Other Terminals: CD changer

LINE IN plugs (only for KD-AR770)

TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range:

FM: 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz

(with channel interval set to 100 kHz or 200 kHz)

87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

(with channel interval set to 50 kHz) AM: 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz

(with channel interval set to 10 kHz) 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz

(with channel interval set to 9 kHz)

[FM Tuner]

Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 ??V/75 ???) 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

16.3 dBf (1.8 ??V/75 ???)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

Stereo Separation: 35 dB

[AM Tuner]

Sensitivity: 20 ??V

Selectivity: 35 dB

CD PLAYER/USB MEMORY SECTION

Type: Compact disc player

Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)

Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit MP3 Decoding Format:

MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3 Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps

WMA (Windows Media?? Audio) Decoding Format:

Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps Playable USB memory:

Format: FAT 12/16/32

Storage: Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)

Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA

Max. Current: Less than 500 mA

GENERAL

Power Requirement: Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance) Grounding System: Negative ground Allowable Operating Temperature:

0??C to +40??C (32??F to 104??F) Dimensions (W ?? H ?? D):

Installation Size (approx.):

182 mm ?? 52 mm ?? 152 mm (7-3/16" ?? 2-1/16" ?? 6")

Panel Size (approx.):

188 mm ?? 58 mm ?? 11 mm (7-7/16" ?? 2-5/16" ?? 7/16")

Mass (approx.):

1.4 kg (3.1 lbs) (excluding accessories)

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

If a kit is necessary for your car, consult your telephone directory for the nearest car audio speciality shop.

ENGLISH

31

Having TROUBLE with operation? Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

Still having trouble??

USA ONLY

Call 1-800-252-5722

http://www.jvc.com

We can help you!

KD-AR770/KD-G720

Installation/Connection Manual

Manual de instalaci??n/conexi??n

Manuel d???installation/raccordement

GET0354-002A

[J]

1205DTSMDTJEIN EN, SP, FR

?? 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

FRAN??AIS

Cet appareil est con??u pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant continu de 12 V ?? masse NEGATIVE. Si votre v??hicule n???offre pas ce type d???alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous pouvez acheter chez un revendeur d???autoradios JVC.

WARNINGS

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery???s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before installing the unit.

???Be sure to ground this unit to the car???s chassis again after installation.

Notes:

???Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio dealer.

???It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 ??? to 8 ???). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change ???AMP GAIN??? setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 16 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

???To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.

???The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.

Heat sink

Sumidero t??rmico

Dissipateur de chaleur

ADVERTENCIAS

Para evitar cortocircuitos, recomendamos que desconecte el terminal negativo de la bater??a y que efect??e todas las conexiones el??ctricas antes de instalar la unidad.

???Aseg??rese de volver a conectar a masa esta unidad al chasis del autom??vil despu??s de la instalaci??n.

Notas:

???Reemplace el fusible por uno con la corriente especificada. Si el fusible se quemase frecuentemente consulte con su concesionario de JVC de equipos de audio para autom??viles.

???Se recomienda conectar los altavoces con una potencia m??xima de m??s de 50 W (tanto atr??s como adelante, con una impedancia de 4 ??? a 8 ???). Si la potencia m??xima es de menos de 50 W, cambie ???AMP GAIN??? para evitar da??os en los altavoces (consulte la p??gina 16 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES).

???Para evitar cortocircuitos, cubra los cables NO UTILIZADOS con cinta aislante.

???El sumidero t??rmico estar?? muy caliente despu??s del uso. Aseg??rese de no tocarlo al desmontar esta unidad.

AVERTISSEMENTS

Pour ??viter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de d??brancher la borne n??gative de la batterie et d???effectuer tous les raccordements ??lectriques avant d???installer l???appareil.

???Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise ?? la masse de cet appareil au ch??ssis de la voiture apr??s l???installation.

Remarques:

???Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur pr??cis??e. Si le fusible saute souvent, consulter votre revendeur d???autoradios JVC.

???Il est recommand?? de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance de plus de 50 W (les enceintes arri??re et les enceintes avant, avec une imp??dance comprise entre 4 ??? et 8 ???). Si la puissance maximum est inf??rieure ?? 50 W, changez ???AMP GAIN??? pour ??viter d???endommager vos enceintes (voir page 16 du MANUAL D???INSTRUCTIONS).

???Pour ??viter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont PAS UTILIS??S avec de la bande isolante.

???Le dissipateur de chaleur devient tr??s chaud apr??s usage. Faire attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant cet appareil.

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:

???DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.

???BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.

PRECAUCIONES sobre las conexiones de la fuente de alimentaci??n y de los altavoces:

???NO conecte los conductores de altavoz del cable de alimentaci??n a la bater??a de autom??vil, pues podr??an producirse graves da??os en la unidad.

???ANTES de conectar a los altavoces los conductores de altavoz del cable de alimentaci??n, verifique el conexionado de altavoz de su autom??vil.

PRECAUTIONS sur l???alimentation et la connexion des enceintes:

???NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d???enceintes du cordon d???alimentation ?? la batterie; sinon, l???appareil serait s??rieusement endommag??.

???AVANT de connecter les fils d???enceintes du cordon d???alimentation aux enceintes, v??rifiez le c??blage des enceintes de votre voiture.

Liste des pi??ces pour l???installation et raccordement

Les pi??ces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose manquait, consultez votre revendeur autoradio JVC imm??diatement.

1

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.

???If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.

La siguiente ilustraci??n muestra una instalaci??n t??pica. Si tiene alguna pregunta o necesita informaci??n acerca de las herramientas para instalaci??n, consulte con su concesionario de JVC de equipos de audio para autom??viles o a una compa????a que suministra tales herramientas.

???Si usted no est?? seguro de c??mo instalar correctamente la unidad, h??gala instalar por un t??cnico cualificado.

L???illustration suivante est un exemple d???installation typique. Si vous avez des questions ou avez besoin d???information sur des kits d???installation, consulter votre revendeur d???autoradios JVC ou une compagnie d???approvisionnement.

???Si l???on n???est pas s??r de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le faire installer par un technicien qualifi??.

*1 When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.

*1 Al poner la unidad vertical, tenga cuidado de no da??ar el fusible provisto en la parte posterior.

*1 Lorsque vous mettez l???appareil ?? la verticale, faire attention de ne pas endommager le fusible situ?? sur l???arri??re.

Do the required electrical connections.

Realice las conexiones el??ctricas requeridas.

R??alisez les connexions ??lectriques.

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the sleeve firmly in place.

Doble las leng??etas apropiadas para retener firmemente la manga en su lugar.

Tordez les languettes appropri??es pour maintenir le manchon en place.

Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated so that the unit can be removed.

Inserte las dos manijas y, a continuaci??n, extr??igalas de la manera indicada en la ilustraci??n para poder desmontar la unidad.

Ins??rez les deux poign??es, puis tirez de la fa??on illustr??e de fa??on ?? retirer l???appareil.

When using the optional stay / Cuando emplea un soporte opcional / Lors de l???utilisation du hauban en option

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Instalaci??n de la unidad sin utilizar la cubierta / Lors de l???installation de l???appareil scans utiliser de manchon

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.

En un autom??vil Toyota, por ejemplo, en primer lugar desmonte el autorradio e instale la unidad en su lugar.

Dans une voiture Toyota, par exemple, retirez d???abord l???autoradio et installez l???appareil ?? sa place.

Pocket

Compartimiento

*2 Not supplied for this unit.

*2 No suministrado con esta unidad.

*2 Non fourni avec cet appareil.

Flat type screws???M5 ??? 8 mm (M5 ??? 3/8")*2

Tornillos tipo plano???M5 ??? 8 mm (M5 ??? 3/8 pulgada)*2

Poche

Bracket*2

M??nsula*2

Support*2

Vis ?? t??te plate???M5 ??? 8 mm (M5 ??? 3/8 pouces)*2

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30??.

Instale la unidad a un ??ngulo de menos de 30??.

Installez l???appareil avec un angle de moins de 30??.

Remarque : Lors de l???installation de l???appareil sur le support de montage, s???assurer d???utiliser des vis d???une longueur de 8 mm (3/8 pouces). Si des vis plus longues sont utilis??es, elles peuvent endommager l???appareil.

TROUBLESHOOTING

??? The fuse blows.

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

???Power cannot be turned on.

* Is the yellow lead connected?

???No sound from the speakers.

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

??? Sound is distorted.

*Is the speaker output lead grounded?

*Are the ????????? terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

??? Noise interfere with sounds.

*Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car???s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?

??? Unit becomes hot.

*Is the speaker output lead grounded?

*Are the ????????? terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

??? This unit does not work at all.

* Have you reset your unit?

LOCALIZACION DE AVERIAS

??? El fusible se quema.

* ??Est??n los conductores rojo y negro correctamente conectados?

???No es posible conectar la alimentaci??n.

* ??Est?? el cable amarillo conectado?

???No sale sonido de los altavoces.

* ??Est?? el cable de salida del altavoz cortocircuitado?

??? El sonido presenta distorsi??n.

*??Est?? el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?

*??Est??n los terminales ????????? de los altavoces L y R conectados a una masa com??n?

??? Perturbaci??n de ruido.

*??El terminal de tierra trasero est?? conectado al chasis del autom??vil utilizando los cordones m??s corto y m??s grueso?

??? La unidad se calienta.

*??Est?? el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?

*??Est??n los terminales ????????? de los altavoces L y R conectados a una masa com??n?

??? Este receptor no funciona en absoluto.

* ??Reinicializ?? el receptor?

EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES

??? Le fusible saute.

* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racord??s correctement?

???L???appareil ne peut pas ??tre mise sous tension.

* Le fil jaune est-elle raccord??e?

???Pas de son des enceintes.

* Le fil de sortie d???enceinte est-il court-circuit???

??? Le son est d??form??.

*Le fil de sortie d???enceinte est-il ?? la masse?

*Les bornes ????????? des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble ?? la masse?

??? Interf??rence avec les sons.

*La prise arri??re de mise ?? la terre est-elle connect??e au ch??ssis de la voiture avec un cordon court et ??pais?

??? L???appareil devient chaud.

*Le fil de sortie d???enceinte est-il ?? la masse?

*Les bornes ????????? des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble ?? la masse?

??? Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.

* Avez-vous r??initialis?? votre appareil?

2

A Typical connections / Conexiones tipicas / Raccordements typiques

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.

1Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.

2 Connect the antenna cord.

3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

Antes de la conexi??n: Verifique atentamente el conexionado del veh??culo. Una conexi??n incorrecta podr??a producir da??os graves en la unidad.

Los cordones del cable de alimentaci??n y los del conector procedentes de la carrocer??a del autom??vil podr??an ser de diferentes en color.

1Conecte los conductores de color del cable de alimentaci??n en el orden especificado en la ilustraci??n de abajo.

2 Conecte el cable de antena.

3 Por ??ltimo, conecte el cable de alimentaci??n a la unidad.

Avant de commencer la connexion: V??rifiez attentivement le c??blage du v??hicule. Une connexion incorrecte peut endommager s??rieusement l???appareil.

Le fil du cordon d???alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du ch??ssis de la voiture peuvent ??tre diff??rents en couleur.

1Connectez les fils color??s du cordon d???alimentation dans l???ordre sp??cifi?? sur l???illustration ci-dessous.

2 Connectez le cordon d???antenne.

3 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils ?? l???appareil.

To subwoofer (see diagram )

Antenna connector

Conector de antena

Connecteur d???antenne

Rear ground terminal

Terminal de tierra posterior

Borne arri??re de masse

Line out (see diagram )

Salida de l??nea (v??ase diagrama )

Sortie de ligne (voir le diagramme )

To external components (see diagram )

A los componentes externos (v??ase el diagrama )

Aux appareils ext??rieurs (voir le diagramme )

*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be

Yellow*2

Amarillo*2

Jaune*2

Red

Rojo

Rouge

Blue with white stripe

Azul con rayas blancas

Bleu avec bande blanche

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

A un terminal activo del bloque de fusibles conectado a la bater??a del autom??vil (desviando el interruptor de encendido) (12 V constantes)

A une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connect??e ?? la batterie de la voiture (en d??rivant l???interrupteur d???allumage) (12 V constant)

Porte-fusible

To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any (200 mA max.)

Al conductor remoto de otro equipo o de la antena autom??tica, si hubiere (m??x. 200 mA)

turned on.

*2 Antes de comprobar el funcionamiento de esta unidad previa a de la instalaci??n, es necesario conectar este cable, de lo contrario no se podr?? conectar la alimentaci??n.

*2 Pour v??rifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant installation, ce fil doit ??tre raccord??, sinon l???appareil ne peut pas ??tre mis sous tension.

BConnecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / Conexi??n de los amplificadores y/o subwoofer externos / Connexion d???amplificateurs ext??rieurs et/ou d???un caisson de grave

Vous pouvez connecter des amplificateurs pour am??liorer votre syst??me autoradio.

???Connectez le fil de commande ?? distance (bleu avec bande blanche) au fil de commande ?? distance de l???autre appareil de fa??on qu???il puisse ??tre command?? via cet appareil.

???D??connectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-les ?? l???amplificateur. Laissez les fils d???enceintes de cet appareil inutilis??s.

???Pour le KD-AR770: Le niveau de sortie de ligne de cet appareil est maintenu ?? un niveau ??lev?? pour maintenir une qualit?? Hi-Fi pour les sons reproduits par cet appareil.

Lors de la connexion d???un amplificateur ext??rieur ?? cet appareil, diminuez le r??glage du gain sur l???amplificateur ext??rieur pour obtenir les meilleures performances de cet appareil.

Rear speakers

Altavoces posteriores

Enceintes arri??re

JVC Amplifier

Amplificador de JVC

JVC Amplificateur

Front speakers

Altavoces delanteros

Enceintes avant

JVC Amplifier

Amplificador de JVC

JVC Amplificateur

Front speakers

Altavoces delanteros

Enceintes avant

*4 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

*4 Cable de se??al (no suministrado con esta unidad)

*4 Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet appareil)

JVC Amplifier

Amplificador de JVC

JVC Amplificateur

Subwoofer

Subwoofer

Caisson de grave

*3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car???to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.

*3 Fije firmemente el cable de tierra a la carrocer??a met??lica o al chasis???a un lugar no cubierto con pintura (si est?? cubierto con pintura, qu??tela antes de fijar el cable). De lo contrario, se podr??an producir da??os en la unidad.

*3 Attachez solidement le fil de mise ?? la masse au ch??ssis m??tallique de la voiture????? un endroit qui n???est pas recouvert de peinture (s???il est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d???abord la peinture avant d???attacher le fil). L???appareil peut ??tre endommag?? si cela n???est pas fait correctement.

3

External component
Componente exterior
Appareil ext??rieur
AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)
Adaptador de entrada AUX KS-U58 (no suministrado con esta unidad)
Adaptateur d???entr??e AUX KS-U58 (non fourni avec cet autoradio)
?? la prise DC IN
To DC IN jack
Al jack DC IN
Clavija de alimentaci??n de CC
Fiche d???alimentation CC
DC power plug
?? la prise du casque d?????coute
Miniclavija est??reo
Fiche st??r?? mini
Al jack para auriculares

C Connecting the external components / Conexi??n de los componentes externos / Connexion des appareils ext??rieurs

JVC CD changer, SIRIUS Satellite radio, XM Satellite radio, Apple iPod??, or JVC D. player / Cambiador de CD de JVC, radio satelital SIRIUS, radio satelital XM, iPod?? de Apple o reproductor JVC D. / Changeur de CD JVC, radio satellite SIRIUS, radio satellite XM, iPod?? Apple ou lecteur D. JVC

???Set ???CHANGER??? for the external input setting (See page 16 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Seleccione ???CHANGER??? para el ajuste de entrada externa (Consulte la p??gina16 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES.) / R??glez ???CHANGER??? pour le r??glage de l???entr??e ext??rieures (Voir page16 du MANUEL D???INSTRUCTIONS.)

You can connect these components in series as illustrated below.

???For listening to the SIRIUS Satellite radio, connect a JVC DLP ???Down Link Processor (separately purchased) to this unit.

???The iPod*5 or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)???KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).

Estos componentes se pueden conectar en serie, tal como se muestra en la ilustraci??n de abajo.

???Para escuchar la radio satelital SIRIUS, conecte un DLP (Down Link Processor) de JVC (adquirido por separado) al receptor.

???Puede conectar el iPod*5 o el reproductor D. usando un adaptador de interfaz (no suministrado)???KS-PD100 (para iPod) o KS-PD500 (para el reproductor D.).

Vous pouvez connecter ces appareils en s??rie comme montr??e sur l???illustration.

???Pour ??couter la radio satellite SIRIUS, connectez un processeur DLP JVC ???Processeur de signaux satellite-terre (vendu s??par??ment) ?? cet appareil.

???Le iPod*5 ou le lecteur D. peut ??tre connect?? en utilisant un adaptateur d???interface (non fourni)???KS-PD100 (pour iPod) ou KS-PD500 (pour le lecteur D.).

To CD changer, KS-PD100, or KS-PD500

Al cambiador de CD, KS-PD100 o KS-PD500

Au changeur de CD, KS-PD100 ou KS-PD500

???For listening to the XM Satellite radio, you can also connect XMDirectTM Universal Tuner Box (separately purchased) through this unit using JVC Smart Digital Adapter???XMDJVC100 (not supplied).

???Para escuchar la radio satelital XM, tambi??n puede conectar el Sintonizador universal XMDirect??? (adquirido por separado) al receptor mediante un adaptador Smart Digital XMDJVC100 de JVC (no suministrado).

???Pour ??couter la radio satellite XM, vous pouvez aussi connecter le tuner universel XMDirectTM (vendu s??par??ment) ?? cet appareil en utilisant l???adaptateur num??rique intelligent JVC???XMDJVC100 (non fourni).

Antenna (supplied with XMDirectTM Universal Tuner Box)

Antena (suministrada con el Sintonizador universal XMDirect???)

Antenne (fournie avec le tuner universel XMDirectTM)

XMDirectTM Universal Tuner Box

Sintonizador universal XMDirect???

Tuner universel XMDirectTM

XMDirectTM Universal Tuner Box

Sintonizador universal XMDirect???

Tuner universel XMDirectTM

CAUTION / PRECAUCION / PRECAUTION:

???Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.

???Antes de conectar los componentes externos, aseg??rese de que la unidad est?? apagada.

???Avant de connecter les appareils ext??rieurs, assurez-vous que l???appareil est hors tension.

*5 iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

*5 iPod es una marca comercial de Apple Computer, Inc., registrada en los EE.UU. y otros pa??ses.

*5 iPod est une marque de commerce d???Apple Computer, Inc., enregistr??e aux ??tats-Unis et dans les autres pays.

JVC PnP (Plug and Play) / PnP (???Plug and Play???) JVC / PnP (???Plug and Play???) JVC

??? Set ???EXT IN??? for the external input setting (See page 16 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Seleccione ???EXT IN??? para el ajuste de entrada externa (Consulte la p??gina16 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES.) / R??glez ???EXT IN??? pour le r??glage de l???entr??e ext??rieures (Voir page 16 du MANUEL D???INSTRUCTIONS.)Stereo mini plug To headphones jack

You can also connect JVC PnP through this unit using JVC SIRIUS radio adapter, KS-U100K (not supplied).

??? Turning on/off the unit can also turns on/off the JVC PnP.

Tambi??n podr?? conectar la PnP JVC a trav??s de este receptor utilizando el adaptador para radio SIRIUS JVC, KS-U100K (no suministrado).

??? Al encender/apagar el receptor tambi??n se enciende/apaga la PnP JVC.

Vous pouvez aussi connecter le PnP JVC ?? cet autoradio en utilisant l???adaptateur de radio SIRIUS JVC KS-U100K (non fourni).

??? Mettre sous/hors tension l???autoradio peut aussi mettre sous/hors tension le PnP JVC.

CD changer jack

Jack para el cambiador de CD

Prise du changeur CD

Other external component / Otro componente externo / Autre appareil ext??rieur

External component

Componente exterior

Appareil ext??rieur

External component

Componente exterior

CD changer jack

Appareil ext??rieur

Jack para el cambiador de CD

Prise du changeur CD

3.5 mm stereo mini plug

Miniclavija est??reo de 3,5 mm

Mini fiche st??r??o de 3,5 mm

Only for KD-AR770/s??lo para KD-AR770/seulement pour le KD-AR770

4

CD RECEIVER

KD-G725

KD-G725

ENGLISH

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.

6

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

INSTRUCTIONS

GET0355-001A

[U/UH]

ENGLISH

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1.CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2.CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.

3.CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.

4.REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

How to reset your unit

Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc

???PLEASE??? and ???EJECT??? appear alternately on the display.

???If this does not work, reset your unit.

???Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.

Warning:

If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved in a traffic accident.

How to use the MODE button

If you press MODE, the unit goes into functions mode, then the number buttons and 5/??? buttons work as different function buttons.

Ex.: When number button 2 works as MO (monaural) button.

Time countdown indicator

To use these buttons for their original

functions again after pressing MODE, wait for 5 seconds without pressing any of these buttons until the functions mode is cleared or press MODE again.

For safety...

???Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.

???Stop the car before performing any complicated operations.

Temperature inside the car...

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes normal before operating the unit.

2

How to read this manual

???Button operations are mainly explained with the illustrations in the table below.

???Some related tips and notes are explained in ???More about this unit??? (see pages 18 ??? 21).

Press briefly.

Press repeatedly.

Press either one.

Press and hold until your desired response begins.

Press and hold both buttons at the same time.

The following marks are used to indicate...

: Built-in CD player operations.

: External CD changer operations. : External USB memory operations.

:Indicator displayed for the corresponding operation.

ENGLISH

How to detach/attach the control panel

Detaching...Attaching...

Lever

CAUTION:

The lever comes out if you pressed the 0 button while the panel is detached. If this happens, push the lever back into lock position before attaching the panel.

3

ENGLISH

Control panel

Parts identification

Display window

1 BAND button

2??? Control dial

???(standby/on attenuator) button 3 DISP (display) button

4 Remote sensor

???DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).

5 Display window

6 5(up) / ???(down) buttons

7 EQ (equalizer) button

8 0(eject) button

9 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal p SRC (source) button

q (control panel release) button w SEL (select) button

e MODE button

r MO (monaural) button

tSSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button

y Number buttons u RPT (repeat) button

i RND (random) button o 4/?? buttons

Display window

; Track information indicators???TAG (ID3 Tag), (track/file), (folder)

aTuner reception indicators???ST (stereo), MO (monaural)

s Main display

d Tr (track) indicator

f LOUD (loudness) indicator

g Source display / Volume level indicator h Playback mode / item indicators???

RND (random), (disc),(folder), RPT (repeat)

j Track type indicators*???WMA, MP3

kPlayback source indicators*???

CH: Lights up only when CD-CH is selected as the playback source.

DISC: Lights up for the built-in CD player. l EQ (equalizer) indicator

/Sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer) indicators???USER, ROCK, CLASSIC,

POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ

??? also works as the time countdown indicator and level meter during play (see page 13).

* lights up for the selected item.

4

Installing the lithium coin battery (CR2025)

ENGLISH

Aim the remote controller directly at the remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle in between.

Warning:

???Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.

???Store the battery in a place where children cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.

???To prevent the battery from over-heating, cracking, or starting a fire:

???Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.

???Do not leave the battery with other metallic materials.

???Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar tools.

???Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when throwing away or saving it.

Caution:

1 (standby/on/attenuator) button

???Turns the power on if pressed briefly or attenuates the sound when power is on.

???Turns the power off if pressed and held. 2 5U (up) / D (down) ???buttons

???Changes the FM/AM bands with 5U.

???Changes the preset stations with D ???.

???Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA/ USB.

???While playing an MP3 disc on an MP3-compatible CD changer:

???Changes the disc if pressed briefly.

???Changes the folder if pressed and held.

???While listening to an Apple iPod?? or a JVC D. player:

???Pauses/stops or resumes playback with D ???.

???Enter the main menu with 5U. (Now 5U/D ???/2R/F 3work as the

menu selecting buttons.)*

3VOL ??? / VOL + buttons

???Adjusts the volume level. 4 SOUND button

???Selects the sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer).

5SOURCE button

??? Selects the source.

*5U : Returns to the previous menu.

D ??? : Confirms the selection.

Continued on the next page...

5

ENGLISH

62 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons

???Searches for stations if pressed briefly.

???Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and held.

???Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.

???While listening to an iPod or a D. player (in menu selecting mode):

???Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press D ??? to confirm the selection.)

???Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.

@Adjust the sound as you want. (See page 12.)

Caution on volume setting:

Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.

Getting started

Basic operations

~ Turn on the power.

??

*You cannot select these sources if they are not ready or not connected.

!For FM/AM tuner

??? Adjust the volume.

Volume level appears.

Volume level indicator

To drop the volume in a moment (ATT)

To restore the sound, press it again.

To turn off the power

Basic settings

???See also ???General settings ??? PSM??? on pages 13 and 14.

1

2

1 Canceling the display demonstrations

Select ???DEMO,??? then ???DEMO OFF.???

2Setting the clock

Select ???CLOCK H??? (hour), then adjust the hour.

Select ???CLOCK M??? (minute), then adjust the minute.

6

3 Finish the procedure.

To check the current clock time while the power is turned off

To check other information while listening to the radio

Clock =Station name*

=Frequency =(back to the beginning)

*FM/AM: If no name is assigned to a station, ???NO NAME??? appears. To assign a title to a station, see page 15.

To tune in to a station manually

In step ! on the left...

1

2 Select a desired station frequency.

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive

ENGLISH

Radio operations

~

Lights up when monaural mode is activated.

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure. ???MONO OFF??? appears and the MO indicator goes off.

Lights up when receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength.

Selected band appears.

!Start searching for a station.

When a station is received, searching stops.

To stop searching, press the same button again.

Storing stations in memory

You can preset six stations for each band.

FM station automatic presetting??? SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)

1Select the FM band (FM1 ??? FM3) you want to store into.

2

7

ENGLISH

3

???SSM??? appears, then disappears when automatic presetting is over.

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are searched and stored automatically in the FM band.

Manual presetting

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number 4 of the FM1 band.

1

2

Disc/USB memory operations

Playing a disc in the unit

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.

To stop play and eject the disc

Playing discs in the CD changer

All discs in the magazine will be played repeatedly until you change the source.

??? Ejecting the magazine will also stop playing.

~

Listening to a preset station

1

2Select the preset station (1 ??? 6) you want.

or

*If you have changed the external input setting to ???EXT IN??? (see page 14), you cannot select the CD changer.

??Select a disc.

For disc number from 01 ??? 06:

For disc number from 07 ??? 12:

8

Playing from a USB memory

This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a USB memory.

All tracks in the USB memory will be played repeatedly until you change the source.

???Removing the USB memory will also stop playback.

~

USB memory

If a USB memory has been attached...

About MP3 and WMA tracks

MP3 and WMA ???tracks??? (words ???file??? and ???track??? are used interchangeably) are recorded in ???folders.???

About the CD changer

It is recommended to use a JVC MP3- compatible CD changer with your unit.

???You can also connect MP3-incompatible CD changers. However, these units are not compatible with MP3 discs.

???You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.

???You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD changer.

???Disc text information recorded in the CD Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text compatible CD changer is connected.

???For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume).

To fast-forward or reverse the track

ENGLISH

To go to the next or previous tracks

Playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.

???If a different USB memory is currently attached, playback starts from the beginning.

To detach the USB memory, straightly pull it out from the unit.

Cautions:

???Avoid using the USB memory if it might hinder your safety driving.

???Make sure all important data has been backed up to avoid losing the data.

Continued on the next page...

9

ENGLISH

To go to the next or previous folders (only for MP3/WMA/USB)

For MP3 tracks: For WMA tracks:

Other main functions

Skipping tracks quickly during play

Only possible on JVC

MP3-compatible CD changer

To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder (for MP3/WMA/USB) directly

To select a number from 01 ??? 06:

To select a number from 07 ??? 12:

???To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA/ USB, it is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their folder names???01, 02, 03, and so on.

To select a particular track in a folder (for MP3/WMA/USB):

???For MP3/WMA/USB, you can skip tracks within the same folder.

Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track whose number is a single digit (1 to 9)

1

2

Each time you press the button, you can skip 10 tracks.

???After the last track, the first track will be selected and vice versa.

3

Prohibiting disc ejection

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure.

10

You can use only one of the following playback modes at a time.

1

While playing an audio CD or a CD Text

2 Select your desired playback mode.

7 Repeat play

ENGLISH

While playing an MP3/WMA*2 disc or

USB memory

???When ???TAG DISP??? is set to ???TAG ON??? (see page 14)

???When ???TAG DISP??? is set to ???TAG OFF???

: Clock with the current track number

: Elapsed playing time with the current track number

*1 If the current disc is an audio CD, ???NO NAME??? appears.

*2 Only for the built-in CD player and external USB memory.

*3 If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information, folder name and file name appear. In this case, the TAG indicator will not light up.

TRK RPT : The current track.

FLDR RPT*4 : All tracks of the current folder.

DISC RPT*5 : All tracks of the current disc.

RPT OFF : Cancels.

7 Random play

Mode Plays at random

FLDR RND*4 : All tracks of the current folder, then tracks of the next folder and so on.

*4 Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/ USB).

*5 Only while playing discs in the CD changer.

11

Sound adjustments

Adjusting the sound

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your preference.

1

2

Indication pattern changes as you adjust the level.

Ex.: When ???TRE??? is selected

Indication [Range]

BAS*1 (bass)

Adjust the bass. [???06 to +06]

TRE*1 (treble)

Adjust the treble. [???06 to +06]

FAD*2 (fader)

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance. [R06 to F06]

BAL*3 (balance)

Adjust the left and right speaker balance. [L06 to R06]

LOUD*1 (loudness)

Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced sound at low volume level. [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]

SUB.W*4 (subwoofer)

Adjust the subwoofer output level. [00 to 08]

VOL (volume)

Adjust the volume. [00 to 30 or 50*5]

*1 When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness, the adjustment you have made is stored for the currently selected sound mode (C-EQ) including ???USER.???

*2 If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to ???00.???

*3 This adjustment cannot affect the subwoofer output.

*4 This takes effect only when a subwoofer is connected.

*5 Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See page 14 for details.)

12

General settings ??? PSM

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items listed in the table that follows.

2 Select a PSM item.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other PSM items if necessary.

5 Finish the procedure.

ENGLISH

Ex.: When ???DIMMER??? is selected

??? Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the setting.

Continued on the next page...

13

ENGLISH

*1 Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display. *2 Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected???FM, AM, CD or USB.

14

You can assign titles to station frequencies and

CDs (both in this unit and the CD changer).

ENGLISH

*You cannot assign a title to a CD Text or an MP3/WMA disc or a USB memory.

1Select the sources.

???For FM/AM tuner: Select a station.

???For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.

???For CDs in the CD changer: Select ???CD-CH,??? then select a disc number.

2 Enter the title assignment mode.

Ex.: When you select ???CD??? as the source

3Assign a title.

1 Select a character.

3Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish entering the title.

4 Finish the procedure.

To erase the entire title

In step 2 on the left...

15

iPod??/D. player operations

???Adjust the sound as you want. (See page 12.)

??? Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or D. player is deactivated.

To pause*1 or stop*2 playback

To resume playback, press it again.

To fast-forward or reverse the track

To go to the next or previous tracks

*1 For iPod

*2 For D. player

Selecting a track from the menu

1 Enter the main menu.

Now the 5/???/ 4/??buttons work as the menu selecting buttons*3.

2 Select the desired menu.

For iPod:

PLAYLIST ??ARTISTS ??ALBUMS ??SONGS ??GENRES ??COMPOSER ??(back to the

beginning)

For D. player:

PLAYLIST ??ARTIST ??ALBUM ??GENRE

??TRACK ??(back to the beginning)

16

3 Confirm the selection.

To move back to the previous menu, press 5.

???If a track is selected, playback starts automatically.

???If the selected item has another layer, you will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the desired track is played.

???Holding 4/?? can skip 10 items at a time.

*3 The menu selecting mode will be canceled:

???If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.

???When you confirm the selection of a track.

7 Random play

ALBM RND*4

Functions the same as ???Shuffle Albums??? of the iPod.

SONG RND/RND ON

Functions the same as ???Shuffle Songs??? of the iPod or ???Random Play =On??? of the D. player.

RND OFF

Cancels.

*4 For iPod: Only if you select ???ALL??? in ???ALBUMS??? of the main ???MENU.???

ENGLISH

Selecting the playback modes

1

2 Select your desired playback mode.

7 Repeat play

ONE RPT

Functions the same as ???Repeat One??? of the iPod or ???Repeat Mode =One??? for the D. player.

ALL RPT

Functions the same as ???Repeat All??? of the iPod or ???Repeat Mode =All??? for the D. player.

RPT OFF

Cancels.

To check other information while listening to an iPod or a D. player

17

If ???EXT IN??? does not appear, see page 14 and select the external input (???EXT IN???).

??Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

! Adjust the volume.

???Adjust the sound as you want. (See page 12.)

To check other information while listening to an external component

Clock ??EXT IN

More about this unit

Basic operations

Turning on the power

???By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.

Turning off the power

???If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc play will start from where playback has been stopped previously, next time you turn on the power.

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

???During SSM search...

???All previously stored stations are erased and stations are stored newly.

???Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).

???When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.

???When storing a station manually, the previously preset station is erased when a new station is stored in the same preset number.

Disc operations

Caution for DualDisc playback

???The Non-DVD side of a ???DualDisc??? does not comply with the ???Compact Disc Digital Audio??? standard. Therefore, the use of Non- DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may not be recommended.

General

???This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/ CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA formats.

Inserting a disc

???Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into the loading slot.

18

???When a disc is inserted upside down, ???PLEASE??? and ???EJECT??? appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to eject the disc.

Playing a disc

???While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

???Use only ???finalized??? CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

???This unit can play back only files of the same type which are first detected if a disc includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/ WMA files.

???This unit can play back multi-session discs; however, unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.

???Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the following reasons:

???Discs are dirty or scratched.

???Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside the unit.

???The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

???CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with ???Packet Write??? method.

???There are improper recording conditions (missing data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched, warped, etc.).

???CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.

???Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

???Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck to the surface.

???Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an ink jet printer.

Using these discs under high temperatures or high humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the unit.

Playing an MP3/WMA disc

???This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the letter case???upper/lower).

???This unit can show the names of albums, artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.

???This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other characters can be correctly displayed.

???This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the conditions below:

???Bit rate: 8 kbps ??? 320 kbps

???Sampling frequency:

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1) 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)

???Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name

???The maximum number of characters for file/ folder names vary among the disc format used (includes 4 extension characters???<.mp3> or <.wma>).

???ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

???ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

???Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters

???Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters

???Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72)

characters

*The parenthetic figure is the maximum number of characters for file/folder names in case the total number of files and folders is 313 or more.

???This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time. Especially, after performing the search function, this difference becomes noticeable.

???This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.

???This unit cannot play back the following files:

??? MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.

??? MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.

??? MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

??? WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and voice format.

??? WMA files which are not based upon Windows Media?? Audio.

Continued on the next page...

ENGLISH

19

ENGLISH

???WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

???Files which have the data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.

???The search function works but search speed is not constant.

Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB memory

???While playing from a USB memory, the playback order may differ from other players.

???This unit may be unable to play back some USB memories or some files due to their characteristics or recording conditions.

???Depending on the shape of the USB memories and connection ports, some USB memories may not be attached properly or the connection might be loose.

???It is not recommended to use a USB memory wider than 20 mm as it will block you from pressing the 0 button.

???If the connected USB memory does not have the correct files, ???NO FILES??? appears and the unit returns to the previous source.

???This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.

???This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the conditions below:

???Bit rate:

MP3: 32 kbps ??? 320 kbps (MPEG-1)

8 kbps ??? 160 kbps (MPEG-2/2.5) WMA:5 kbps ??? 320 kbps

???Sampling frequency:

MP3: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, (MPEG-1) 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz, (MPEG-2) 12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz, (MPEG- 2.5)

WMA:8 kHz ??? 48 kHz

???This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in VBR (variable bit rate).

???The maximum number of characters for folder and file names is 25 characters; 128 characters for MP3/WMA tag information.

???This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files and 250 folders (999 files per folder).

???This unit cannot play back the following files:

???MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.

???MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.

???MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

Changing the source

???If you change the source, playback also stops. Next time you select the same source again, playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.

Ejecting a disc

???If the ejected disc is not removed within

15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted again into the loading slot to protect it from dust. (Disc will not play this time.)

General settings???PSM

??????AUTO??? setting for ???DIMMER??? may not work correctly on some vehicles, particularly on those having a control dial for dimming. In this case, change the ???DIMMER??? setting to any other than ???AUTO.???

???If you change the ???AMP GAIN??? setting from ???HIGH PWR??? to ???LOW PWR??? while the volume level is set higher than ???VOL 30,??? the unit automatically changes the volume level to ???VOL 30.???

Title assignment

???If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station frequencies or 30 discs, ???NAMEFULL??? appears. Delete unwanted titles before assignment.

???Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can also be shown if you play back the disc from the unit and vice versa.

iPod?? or D. player operations

???When you turn on this unit, the iPod or

D.player is charged through this unit.

???While the iPod or D. player is connected to this unit, all operations from the iPod or

D.player are disabled. Perform all operations from this unit.

???The text information may not be displayed correctly.

??? Some characters such as accented letters cannot be shown correctly on the display.

20

???Depends on the condition of communication between the iPod or D. player and the unit.

???If the text information includes more than 8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see also page 13). This unit can display up to 40 characters.

Notice:

When operating an iPod or a D. player, some operations may not be performed correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the following JVC web site:

For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/ english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>

For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/ english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>

ENGLISH

Maintenance

How to clean the connectors

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.

Connector

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the CD player in the following cases:

???After starting the heater in the car.

???If it becomes very humid inside the car. Should this occur, the CD player may malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until the moisture evaporates.

How to handle discs

???Always hold the disc by the

edges. Do not touch its recording surface.

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the disc around the center holder (with the printed surface facing up).

???Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.

To keep discs clean

A dirty disc may not play correctly. If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to edge.

???Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean discs.

To play new discs

New discs may have some rough spots around the inner and outer edges. If such a disc is used, this unit may reject the disc.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Do not use the following discs:

Warped disc

21

ENGLISH

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.

22

MP3/WMA playback

USB memory playback

ENGLISH

Continued on the next page...

23

iPod/D. player playback

???Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

???iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

24

Specifications

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION

Maximum Power Output: Front: 50 W per channel Rear: 50 W per channel

Continuous Power Output (RMS):

Front: 19 W per channel into 4 ???, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion.

Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 ???, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion.

Load Impedance: 4 ??? (4 ??? to 8 ??? allowance) Tone Control Range:

Bass: ??10 dB at 100 Hz

Treble: ??10 dB at 10 kHz Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB

Line-Out Level/Impedance:

2.5 V/20 k??? load (full scale) Output Impedance: 1 k??? Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:

2.0 V/20 k??? load (full scale) Other Terminal: CD changer

TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range:

FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz

[FM Tuner]

Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 ??V/75 ???) 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

16.3 dBf (1.8 ??V/75 ???)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

Stereo Separation: 30 dB

[AM Tuner]

Sensitivity: 20 ??V

Selectivity: 35 dB

CD PLAYER/USB MEMORY SECTION

Type: Compact disc player

Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)

Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit MP3 Decoding Format:

MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3 Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps

WMA (Windows Media?? Audio) Decoding Format:

Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps Playable USB memory:

Format: FAT 12/16/32

Storage: Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)

Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA

Max. Current: Less than 500 mA

GENERAL

Power Requirement: Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance) Grounding System: Negative ground Allowable Operating Temperature:

0??C to +40??C Dimensions (W ?? H ?? D):

Installation Size (approx.):

182 mm ?? 52 mm ?? 152 mm Panel Size (approx.):

188 mm ?? 58 mm ?? 11 mm Mass (approx.):

1.4 kg (excluding accessories)

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

ENGLISH

25

Having TROUBLE with operation?

Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

KD-G725

Installation/Connection Manual

???????????????????/??????????????????????????????????????????

ENGLISH

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.

????????

??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? ?????????? ???????????? ????????????????????????????????????? ??????? 12 ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? ?????????????? ???????? ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????? JVC

WARNINGS

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery???s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before installing the unit.

??? Be sure to ground this unit to the car???s chassis again after installation.

?????????????????

??????????????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????????????????????????

??? ????????? ??????????????????????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????? ???????????

Notes:

???Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio dealers.

???It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 ??? to 8 ???). If the maximum power is less than

50 W, change ???AMP GAIN??? setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 14 of the

INSTRUCTIONS).

???To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.

???The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.

?????????????????????????????????????????? ????????? ???????????????????? ????????? ??????????????????? ?????????????????????????????????????????????? ????????? ??????????

?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????? ??????? ??? ????????????????????????????????????????????????

Heat sink

????????????????????????????????????????

???BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.

H

Mounting bolt (M5 ??? 20 mm)

????????????? ?? (M5 ??? 20 ????.)

1

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealers or a company supplying kits.

??? If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.

*1 When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.

*1 ????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????? ??????????????????????

???????????????????? ??????????????????? ??????????????????? ????????????

???????????????????????? (????????????????????????????????????????????????????? ???????)

????????????????????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? ?????????????????? ?????????????????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????? ??? ??????????????????JVC ?????????????????????????????????????????

??? ?????????????????????? ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Do the required electrical connections.

?????? ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? ??

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the sleeve firmly in place.

?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? ???????????????

Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated so that the unit can be removed.

??? ???? ???????? ??????? ?????? 2 ?????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????????? ?? ?????????????? ????????????????

?????????????????????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????? ?? ??????????????????????????????????????? ????

???????????????????????????

When using the optional stay / ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / ????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.

???????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Dashboard

???????????????????????????

Screw (option)

???????(????????????????????)

Flat type screws (M5 ??? 8 mm)*2

???????????????????????????? (M5 ??? 8 ????.)*2

Bracket*2

?????????????????????????*2

Pocket

????????????????

Bracket*2

*2 Not supplied for this unit.

*2 ??????????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????

Flat type screws (M5 ??? 8 mm)*2

???????????????????????????? (M5 ??? 8 ????.)*2

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30??.

????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????????????????? 30?? ?????????

?????????????????????????*2

TROUBLESHOOTING

??? The fuse blows.

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

???Power cannot be turned on.

* Is the yellow lead connected?

???No sound from the speakers.

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

??? Sound is distorted.

*Is the speaker output lead grounded?

*Are the ????????? terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

??? Noise interfere with sounds.

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car???s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?

??? This unit becomes hot.

*Is the speaker output lead grounded?

*Are the ????????? terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

??? This unit does not work at all.

* Have you reset your unit?

????????????????? ?????????????????? ??????? ????????

??? ??????? ?????????

* ???????????????????????????? ??????????????????? ???????????????? ????????????????????????????????????????????????????

?????????? ????????????????????????????????????????????????

* ???????????????????????????? ??????????????????? ???????????????????????????????????

?????????????????? ?????????????????????????????????

* ??????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????

??? ??? ?????????????????????

*??????????????????? ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

*???????????????????? ????????? ???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

??? ??? ???????????????????

* ????????????????????? ????? ????????? ??????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

??? ???????????????????????????????????????

*??????????????????? ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

*???????????????????? ????????? ???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

??? ???????????????????????????????????????????????????

* ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

2

A Typical connections / ???????????????????????????????????????????

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.

1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.

2 Connect the antenna cord.

3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

????????????????????????????????????????????: ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? ?????????? ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????????????????????????????

1 ?????? ?????????? ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

2 ??????????????????????????????????????????????

3 ?????????????? ?????? ????????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????

?????????????? ?????????????? ????????????????? ???????????? ??????????????????????????????????????????????(??????????????????? )

Rear ground terminal

??????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????

Line out (see diagram )

??????????? (???????????????????)

To external components (see diagram )

???????????? ????????????????????????????????????????????????? (??????????????????? )

15 A fuse

??????? ??????????? 15 A

*1 Not supplied for this unit.

*1 ??????????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????

Black

????? ???

To metallic body or chassis of the car

??????????????????????????????????????????????????? ????? ????????????????????

Yellow *2

?????????????????? *2

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

?????????????? ??????????????????????????? ????? ?????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

(?????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????????????) (12 ?????????????????????????)

Ignition switch

????????????????????????????????????

*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.

*2 ????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

?????????????? ?????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????????????????

Red

????? ????

Blue

????????????

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

?????????????? ????????? ??????????? ????????????????????????????

To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)

??? ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????(????????? ???? ???? 250 mA)

Fuse block

?????????????

Blue with white stripe

???????????????????????????? ???????

To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)

??????????????????????????????????????????????? (????????? ???? ???? 200 mA)

Orange with white stripe

??? ???????????? ???????

To car light control switch

????????????????????????????????????????????????????

3

B Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / ???????????????????????????????????????????????/???????????????????????????????????? ???????????????

You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.

???Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through this unit.

???Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.

??????? ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? ????????? ????????? ?????????????????????????????????????

????????? ?????????????????????????????????????? ( ???????????????????????????? ???????) ?????????????????? ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? ?? ????????????????? ????????????????????????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????

??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? ????????? ?????????? ???????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????????????

Rear speakers

???????????????????????

JVC Amplifier

????????????????????????????? ??????? JVC

Front speakers

??????????????????????

JVC Amplifier

????????????????????????????? ??????? JVC

C Connecting the external components / ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

CD changer, Apple iPod??, or JVC D. player / CD ????????????????????, Apple iPod?? ????????????????????????????????????? JVC D.

??? Set ???CHANGER??? for the external input setting (See page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / ???????????????? ???CHANGER??? ????????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????????????????? (????????????? 14 ?????????????????)

You can connect these components as illustrated below.

The iPod*5 or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)???KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).

?????????? ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????

?????????? ??????????????????????????????????? iPod*5 ????????????????????????????????????? D. ???????????????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????(????????????????????????)???KS-PD100 ( ?????????????? iPod) ?????????? KS-PD500 ( ????????????????????????????????????????? D.)

CAUTION / ??????????????????????????:

???Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.

?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

or

??????????

JVC CD changer

JVC CD ????????????????????

CD changer jack

???????????? ?????????????? ??????

??????????????????????????? CD

*5 iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

*5 iPod ???????????????????????????????????????????????????????? Apple Computer, Inc. ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Apple iPod (separately purchased)

Apple iPod (??????????????????????)

JVC D. player (separately purchased)

??????????????????????????? JVC D. (??????????????????????)

*6 Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer

*6 ?????? ????????????????????????? ?????????????? CD ????????????????????

Other external component / ????????????????????????????????????????

??? Set ???EXT IN??? for the external input setting (See page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / ???????????????? ???EXT IN??? ???????????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????????????????? (????????????? 14 ?????????????????)

External component

?????????????????????????????

*7 Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)

*7 ????????????????????????? ????????????????????????? KS-U57 (??????????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????)

3.5 mm stereo mini plug

???????????? ?????????????????? ??????????????????????????? 3.5 ????.

*8 AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)

*8 ???????????????????????????????? ??????????????? AUX ????????? KS-U58 (??????????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????)

4

CD RECEIVER

ALAT PENERIMA CD

KD-G725

KD-G725

INDONESIA ENGLISH

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.

Untuk membatalkan tampilan demonstrasi, lihat halaman 6.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

Untuk instalasi dan penyambungan, lihat buku pedoman terpisah.

INSTRUCTIONS

BUKU PETUNJUK

GET0355-004A

[UN]

ENGLISH

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1.CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2.CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.

3.CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.

4.REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

How to reset your unit

Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc

???PLEASE??? and ???EJECT??? appear alternately on the display.

???If this does not work, reset your unit.

???Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.

Warning:

If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved in a traffic accident.

How to use the MODE button

If you press MODE, the unit goes into functions mode, then the number buttons and 5/??? buttons work as different function buttons.

Ex.: When number button 2 works as MO (monaural) button.

Time countdown indicator

To use these buttons for their original

functions again after pressing MODE, wait for 5 seconds without pressing any of these buttons until the functions mode is cleared or press MODE again.

For safety...

???Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.

???Stop the car before performing any complicated operations.

Temperature inside the car...

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes normal before operating the unit.

2

How to read this manual

???Button operations are mainly explained with the illustrations in the table below.

???Some related tips and notes are explained in ???More about this unit??? (see pages 18 ??? 21).

Press briefly.

Press repeatedly.

Press either one.

Press and hold until your desired response begins.

Press and hold both buttons at the same time.

The following marks are used to indicate...

: Built-in CD player operations.

: External CD changer operations. : External USB memory operations.

:Indicator displayed for the corresponding operation.

ENGLISH

How to detach/attach the control panel

Detaching...Attaching...

Lever

CAUTION:

The lever comes out if you pressed the 0 button while the panel is detached. If this happens, push the lever back into lock position before attaching the panel.

3

ENGLISH

Control panel

Parts identification

Display window

1 BAND button

2??? Control dial

???(standby/on attenuator) button 3 DISP (display) button

4 Remote sensor

???DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).

5 Display window

6 5(up) / ???(down) buttons

7 EQ (equalizer) button

8 0(eject) button

9 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal p SRC (source) button

q (control panel release) button w SEL (select) button

e MODE button

r MO (monaural) button

tSSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button

y Number buttons u RPT (repeat) button

i RND (random) button o 4/?? buttons

Display window

; Track information indicators???TAG (ID3 Tag), (track/file), (folder)

aTuner reception indicators???ST (stereo), MO (monaural)

s Main display

d Tr (track) indicator

f LOUD (loudness) indicator

g Source display / Volume level indicator h Playback mode / item indicators???

RND (random), (disc),(folder), RPT (repeat)

j Track type indicators*???WMA, MP3

kPlayback source indicators*???

CH: Lights up only when CD-CH is selected as the playback source.

DISC: Lights up for the built-in CD player. l EQ (equalizer) indicator

/Sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer) indicators???USER, ROCK, CLASSIC,

POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ

??? also works as the time countdown indicator and level meter during play (see page 13).

* lights up for the selected item.

4

Installing the lithium coin battery (CR2025)

ENGLISH

Aim the remote controller directly at the remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle in between.

Warning:

???Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.

???Store the battery in a place where children cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.

???To prevent the battery from over-heating, cracking, or starting a fire:

???Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.

???Do not leave the battery with other metallic materials.

???Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar tools.

???Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when throwing away or saving it.

Caution:

1 (standby/on/attenuator) button

???Turns the power on if pressed briefly or attenuates the sound when power is on.

???Turns the power off if pressed and held. 2 5U (up) / D (down) ???buttons

???Changes the FM/AM bands with 5U.

???Changes the preset stations with D ???.

???Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA/ USB.

???While playing an MP3 disc on an MP3-compatible CD changer:

???Changes the disc if pressed briefly.

???Changes the folder if pressed and held.

???While listening to an Apple iPod?? or a JVC D. player:

???Pauses/stops or resumes playback with D ???.

???Enter the main menu with 5U. (Now 5U/D ???/2R/F 3work as the

menu selecting buttons.)*

3VOL ??? / VOL + buttons

???Adjusts the volume level. 4 SOUND button

???Selects the sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer).

5SOURCE button

??? Selects the source.

*5U : Returns to the previous menu.

D ??? : Confirms the selection.

Continued on the next page...

5

ENGLISH

62 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons

???Searches for stations if pressed briefly.

???Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and held.

???Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.

???While listening to an iPod or a D. player (in menu selecting mode):

???Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press D ??? to confirm the selection.)

???Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.

@Adjust the sound as you want. (See page 12.)

Caution on volume setting:

Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.

Getting started

Basic operations

~ Turn on the power.

??

*You cannot select these sources if they are not ready or not connected.

!For FM/AM tuner

??? Adjust the volume.

Volume level appears.

Volume level indicator

To drop the volume in a moment (ATT)

To restore the sound, press it again.

To turn off the power

Basic settings

???See also ???General settings ??? PSM??? on pages 13 and 14.

1

2

1 Canceling the display demonstrations

Select ???DEMO,??? then ???DEMO OFF.???

2Setting the clock

Select ???CLOCK H??? (hour), then adjust the hour.

Select ???CLOCK M??? (minute), then adjust the minute.

6

3 Finish the procedure.

To check the current clock time while the power is turned off

To check other information while listening to the radio

Clock =Station name*

=Frequency =(back to the beginning)

*FM/AM: If no name is assigned to a station, ???NO NAME??? appears. To assign a title to a station, see page 15.

To tune in to a station manually

In step ! on the left...

1

2 Select a desired station frequency.

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive

ENGLISH

Radio operations

~

Lights up when monaural mode is activated.

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure. ???MONO OFF??? appears and the MO indicator goes off.

Lights up when receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength.

Selected band appears.

!Start searching for a station.

When a station is received, searching stops.

To stop searching, press the same button again.

Storing stations in memory

You can preset six stations for each band.

FM station automatic presetting??? SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)

1Select the FM band (FM1 ??? FM3) you want to store into.

2

7

ENGLISH

3

???SSM??? appears, then disappears when automatic presetting is over.

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are searched and stored automatically in the FM band.

Manual presetting

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number 4 of the FM1 band.

1

2

Disc/USB memory operations

Playing a disc in the unit

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.

To stop play and eject the disc

Playing discs in the CD changer

All discs in the magazine will be played repeatedly until you change the source.

??? Ejecting the magazine will also stop playing.

~

Listening to a preset station

1

2Select the preset station (1 ??? 6) you want.

or

*If you have changed the external input setting to ???EXT IN??? (see page 14), you cannot select the CD changer.

??Select a disc.

For disc number from 01 ??? 06:

For disc number from 07 ??? 12:

8

Playing from a USB memory

This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a USB memory.

All tracks in the USB memory will be played repeatedly until you change the source.

???Removing the USB memory will also stop playback.

~

USB memory

If a USB memory has been attached...

About MP3 and WMA tracks

MP3 and WMA ???tracks??? (words ???file??? and ???track??? are used interchangeably) are recorded in ???folders.???

About the CD changer

It is recommended to use a JVC MP3- compatible CD changer with your unit.

???You can also connect MP3-incompatible CD changers. However, these units are not compatible with MP3 discs.

???You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.

???You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD changer.

???Disc text information recorded in the CD Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text compatible CD changer is connected.

???For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume).

To fast-forward or reverse the track

ENGLISH

To go to the next or previous tracks

Playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.

???If a different USB memory is currently attached, playback starts from the beginning.

To detach the USB memory, straightly pull it out from the unit.

Cautions:

???Avoid using the USB memory if it might hinder your safety driving.

???Make sure all important data has been backed up to avoid losing the data.

Continued on the next page...

9

ENGLISH

To go to the next or previous folders (only for MP3/WMA/USB)

For MP3 tracks: For WMA tracks:

Other main functions

Skipping tracks quickly during play

Only possible on JVC

MP3-compatible CD changer

To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder (for MP3/WMA/USB) directly

To select a number from 01 ??? 06:

To select a number from 07 ??? 12:

???To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA/ USB, it is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their folder names???01, 02, 03, and so on.

To select a particular track in a folder (for MP3/WMA/USB):

???For MP3/WMA/USB, you can skip tracks within the same folder.

Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track whose number is a single digit (1 to 9)

1

2

Each time you press the button, you can skip 10 tracks.

???After the last track, the first track will be selected and vice versa.

3

Prohibiting disc ejection

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure.

10

You can use only one of the following playback modes at a time.

1

While playing an audio CD or a CD Text

2 Select your desired playback mode.

7 Repeat play

ENGLISH

While playing an MP3/WMA*2 disc or

USB memory

???When ???TAG DISP??? is set to ???TAG ON??? (see page 14)

???When ???TAG DISP??? is set to ???TAG OFF???

: Clock with the current track number

: Elapsed playing time with the current track number

*1 If the current disc is an audio CD, ???NO NAME??? appears.

*2 Only for the built-in CD player and external USB memory.

*3 If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information, folder name and file name appear. In this case, the TAG indicator will not light up.

TRK RPT : The current track.

FLDR RPT*4 : All tracks of the current folder.

DISC RPT*5 : All tracks of the current disc.

RPT OFF : Cancels.

7 Random play

Mode Plays at random

FLDR RND*4 : All tracks of the current folder, then tracks of the next folder and so on.

*4 Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/ USB).

*5 Only while playing discs in the CD changer.

11

Sound adjustments

Adjusting the sound

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your preference.

1

2

Indication pattern changes as you adjust the level.

Ex.: When ???TRE??? is selected

Indication [Range]

BAS*1 (bass)

Adjust the bass. [???06 to +06]

TRE*1 (treble)

Adjust the treble. [???06 to +06]

FAD*2 (fader)

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance. [R06 to F06]

BAL*3 (balance)

Adjust the left and right speaker balance. [L06 to R06]

LOUD*1 (loudness)

Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced sound at low volume level. [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]

SUB.W*4 (subwoofer)

Adjust the subwoofer output level. [00 to 08]

VOL (volume)

Adjust the volume. [00 to 30 or 50*5]

*1 When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness, the adjustment you have made is stored for the currently selected sound mode (C-EQ) including ???USER.???

*2 If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to ???00.???

*3 This adjustment cannot affect the subwoofer output.

*4 This takes effect only when a subwoofer is connected.

*5 Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See page 14 for details.)

12

General settings ??? PSM

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items listed in the table that follows.

2 Select a PSM item.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other PSM items if necessary.

5 Finish the procedure.

ENGLISH

Ex.: When ???DIMMER??? is selected

??? Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the setting.

Continued on the next page...

13

ENGLISH

*1 Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display. *2 Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected???FM, AM, CD or USB.

14

You can assign titles to station frequencies and

CDs (both in this unit and the CD changer).

ENGLISH

*You cannot assign a title to a CD Text or an MP3/WMA disc or a USB memory.

1Select the sources.

???For FM/AM tuner: Select a station.

???For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.

???For CDs in the CD changer: Select ???CD-CH,??? then select a disc number.

2 Enter the title assignment mode.

Ex.: When you select ???CD??? as the source

3Assign a title.

1 Select a character.

3Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish entering the title.

4 Finish the procedure.

To erase the entire title

In step 2 on the left...

15

iPod??/D. player operations

???Adjust the sound as you want. (See page 12.)

??? Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or D. player is deactivated.

To pause*1 or stop*2 playback

To resume playback, press it again.

To fast-forward or reverse the track

To go to the next or previous tracks

*1 For iPod

*2 For D. player

Selecting a track from the menu

1 Enter the main menu.

Now the 5/???/ 4/??buttons work as the menu selecting buttons*3.

2 Select the desired menu.

For iPod:

PLAYLIST ??ARTISTS ??ALBUMS ??SONGS ??GENRES ??COMPOSER ??(back to the

beginning)

For D. player:

PLAYLIST ??ARTIST ??ALBUM ??GENRE

??TRACK ??(back to the beginning)

16

3 Confirm the selection.

To move back to the previous menu, press 5.

???If a track is selected, playback starts automatically.

???If the selected item has another layer, you will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the desired track is played.

???Holding 4/?? can skip 10 items at a time.

*3 The menu selecting mode will be canceled:

???If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.

???When you confirm the selection of a track.

7 Random play

ALBM RND*4

Functions the same as ???Shuffle Albums??? of the iPod.

SONG RND/RND ON

Functions the same as ???Shuffle Songs??? of the iPod or ???Random Play =On??? of the D. player.

RND OFF

Cancels.

*4 For iPod: Only if you select ???ALL??? in ???ALBUMS??? of the main ???MENU.???

ENGLISH

Selecting the playback modes

1

2 Select your desired playback mode.

7 Repeat play

ONE RPT

Functions the same as ???Repeat One??? of the iPod or ???Repeat Mode =One??? for the D. player.

ALL RPT

Functions the same as ???Repeat All??? of the iPod or ???Repeat Mode =All??? for the D. player.

RPT OFF

Cancels.

To check other information while listening to an iPod or a D. player

17

If ???EXT IN??? does not appear, see page 14 and select the external input (???EXT IN???).

??Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

! Adjust the volume.

???Adjust the sound as you want. (See page 12.)

To check other information while listening to an external component

Clock ??EXT IN

More about this unit

Basic operations

Turning on the power

???By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.

Turning off the power

???If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc play will start from where playback has been stopped previously, next time you turn on the power.

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

???During SSM search...

???All previously stored stations are erased and stations are stored newly.

???Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).

???When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.

???When storing a station manually, the previously preset station is erased when a new station is stored in the same preset number.

Disc operations

Caution for DualDisc playback

???The Non-DVD side of a ???DualDisc??? does not comply with the ???Compact Disc Digital Audio??? standard. Therefore, the use of Non- DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may not be recommended.

General

???This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/ CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA formats.

Inserting a disc

???Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into the loading slot.

18

???When a disc is inserted upside down, ???PLEASE??? and ???EJECT??? appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to eject the disc.

Playing a disc

???While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

???Use only ???finalized??? CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

???This unit can play back only files of the same type which are first detected if a disc includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/ WMA files.

???This unit can play back multi-session discs; however, unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.

???Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the following reasons:

???Discs are dirty or scratched.

???Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside the unit.

???The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

???CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with ???Packet Write??? method.

???There are improper recording conditions (missing data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched, warped, etc.).

???CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.

???Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

???Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck to the surface.

???Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an ink jet printer.

Using these discs under high temperatures or high humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the unit.

Playing an MP3/WMA disc

???This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the letter case???upper/lower).

???This unit can show the names of albums, artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.

???This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other characters can be correctly displayed.

???This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the conditions below:

???Bit rate: 8 kbps ??? 320 kbps

???Sampling frequency:

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1) 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)

???Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name

???The maximum number of characters for file/ folder names vary among the disc format used (includes 4 extension characters???<.mp3> or <.wma>).

???ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

???ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

???Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters

???Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters

???Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72)

characters

*The parenthetic figure is the maximum number of characters for file/folder names in case the total number of files and folders is 313 or more.

???This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time. Especially, after performing the search function, this difference becomes noticeable.

???This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.

???This unit cannot play back the following files:

??? MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.

??? MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.

??? MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

??? WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and voice format.

??? WMA files which are not based upon Windows Media?? Audio.

Continued on the next page...

ENGLISH

19

ENGLISH

???WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

???Files which have the data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.

???The search function works but search speed is not constant.

Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB memory

???While playing from a USB memory, the playback order may differ from other players.

???This unit may be unable to play back some USB memories or some files due to their characteristics or recording conditions.

???Depending on the shape of the USB memories and connection ports, some USB memories may not be attached properly or the connection might be loose.

???It is not recommended to use a USB memory wider than 20 mm as it will block you from pressing the 0 button.

???If the connected USB memory does not have the correct files, ???NO FILES??? appears and the unit returns to the previous source.

???This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.

???This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the conditions below:

???Bit rate:

MP3: 32 kbps ??? 320 kbps (MPEG-1)

8 kbps ??? 160 kbps (MPEG-2/2.5) WMA:5 kbps ??? 320 kbps

???Sampling frequency:

MP3: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, (MPEG-1) 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz, (MPEG-2) 12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz, (MPEG- 2.5)

WMA:8 kHz ??? 48 kHz

???This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in VBR (variable bit rate).

???The maximum number of characters for folder and file names is 25 characters; 128 characters for MP3/WMA tag information.

???This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files and 250 folders (999 files per folder).

???This unit cannot play back the following files:

???MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.

???MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.

???MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

Changing the source

???If you change the source, playback also stops. Next time you select the same source again, playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.

Ejecting a disc

???If the ejected disc is not removed within

15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted again into the loading slot to protect it from dust. (Disc will not play this time.)

General settings???PSM

??????AUTO??? setting for ???DIMMER??? may not work correctly on some vehicles, particularly on those having a control dial for dimming. In this case, change the ???DIMMER??? setting to any other than ???AUTO.???

???If you change the ???AMP GAIN??? setting from ???HIGH PWR??? to ???LOW PWR??? while the volume level is set higher than ???VOL 30,??? the unit automatically changes the volume level to ???VOL 30.???

Title assignment

???If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station frequencies or 30 discs, ???NAMEFULL??? appears. Delete unwanted titles before assignment.

???Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can also be shown if you play back the disc from the unit and vice versa.

iPod?? or D. player operations

???When you turn on this unit, the iPod or

D.player is charged through this unit.

???While the iPod or D. player is connected to this unit, all operations from the iPod or

D.player are disabled. Perform all operations from this unit.

???The text information may not be displayed correctly.

??? Some characters such as accented letters cannot be shown correctly on the display.

20

???Depends on the condition of communication between the iPod or D. player and the unit.

???If the text information includes more than 8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see also page 13). This unit can display up to 40 characters.

Notice:

When operating an iPod or a D. player, some operations may not be performed correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the following JVC web site:

For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/ english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>

For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/ english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>

ENGLISH

Maintenance

How to clean the connectors

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.

Connector

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the CD player in the following cases:

???After starting the heater in the car.

???If it becomes very humid inside the car. Should this occur, the CD player may malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until the moisture evaporates.

How to handle discs

???Always hold the disc by the

edges. Do not touch its recording surface.

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the disc around the center holder (with the printed surface facing up).

???Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.

To keep discs clean

A dirty disc may not play correctly. If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to edge.

???Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean discs.

To play new discs

New discs may have some rough spots around the inner and outer edges. If such a disc is used, this unit may reject the disc.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Do not use the following discs:

Warped disc

21

ENGLISH

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.

22

MP3/WMA playback

USB memory playback

ENGLISH

Continued on the next page...

23

iPod/D. player playback

???Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

???iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

24

Specifications

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION

Maximum Power Output: Front: 50 W per channel Rear: 50 W per channel

Continuous Power Output (RMS):

Front: 19 W per channel into 4 ???, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion.

Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 ???, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion.

Load Impedance: 4 ??? (4 ??? to 8 ??? allowance) Tone Control Range:

Bass: ??10 dB at 100 Hz

Treble: ??10 dB at 10 kHz Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB

Line-Out Level/Impedance:

2.5 V/20 k??? load (full scale) Output Impedance: 1 k??? Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:

2.0 V/20 k??? load (full scale) Other Terminal: CD changer

TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range:

FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz

[FM Tuner]

Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 ??V/75 ???) 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

16.3 dBf (1.8 ??V/75 ???)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

Stereo Separation: 30 dB

[AM Tuner]

Sensitivity: 20 ??V

Selectivity: 35 dB

CD PLAYER/USB MEMORY SECTION

Type: Compact disc player

Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)

Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit MP3 Decoding Format:

MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3 Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps

WMA (Windows Media?? Audio) Decoding Format:

Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps Playable USB memory:

Format: FAT 12/16/32

Storage: Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)

Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA

Max. Current: Less than 500 mA

GENERAL

Power Requirement: Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance) Grounding System: Negative ground Allowable Operating Temperature:

0??C to +40??C Dimensions (W ?? H ?? D):

Installation Size (approx.):

182 mm ?? 52 mm ?? 152 mm Panel Size (approx.):

188 mm ?? 58 mm ?? 11 mm Mass (approx.):

1.4 kg (excluding accessories)

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

ENGLISH

25

Having TROUBLE with operation?

Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

Ada MASALAH dengan cara pengoperasian?

Setel kembali unit Anda

Lihat halaman mengenai Bagaimana mereset unit anda

KD-G725

Installation/Connection Manual

Manual Pemasangan/Penyambungan

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.

Alat penerima ini didisain untuk beroperasi hanya pada 12 V DC, sistem listrik tanah NEGATIVE. Jika kendaraan anda tidak memiliki sistem ini, sebuah pembalik tegangan diperlukan, yang mana dapat dibeli di dealer audio mobil JVC.

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery???s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before installing the unit.

??? Be sure to ground this unit to the car???s chassis again after installation.

Notes:

???Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio dealers.

???It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 ??? to 8 ???). If the maximum power is less than

50 W, change ???AMP GAIN??? setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 14 of the

INSTRUCTIONS).

???To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.

???The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.

Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, kami menyarankan anda memutuskan sambungan terminal negatif baterai dan membuat semua sambungan-sambungan listrik sebelum memasang alat penerima.

??? Pastikan untuk mentanahkan alat penerima ini ke casis mobil kembali setelah pemasangan.

Catatan:

???Ganti sekring dengan voltase yang sudah ditetapkan. Jika sekring sering meledak, konsultasikan pada penyalur audio mobil JVC anda.

???Disarankan untuk menghubungkan speaker-speaker dengan maksimum power lebih dari 50 W (keduanya di belakang dan di depan, dengan sebuah impedansi 4 ??? sampai 8 ???). Jika maksimum power kurang dari 50 W, ganti pengaturan ???AMP GAIN??? (???PENAMBAH PENGUAT???) untuk mencegah speaker-speaker dari kerusakan (lihat halaman 14 dari BUKU PETUNJUK).

???Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, tutup ujung-ujung terminal-terminal TIDAK DIGUNAKAN dengan pita isolasi.

???Pendingin menjadi sangat panas setelah digunakan. Hati-hati untuk tidak menyentuhnya ketika memindahkan alat penerima ini.

Heat sink

Pendingin

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:

???DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.

???BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.

TINDAKAN-TINDAKAN PENCEGAHAN pada suplai power dan sambungan-sambungan speaker:

???JANGAN sambungkan ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke baterai mobil; sebaliknya, alat penerima tersebut akan secara serius rusak.

???SEBELUM menyambung ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke speaker-speaker, cek perkabelan speaker dalam mobil anda.

1

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealers or a company supplying kits.

??? If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.

*1 When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.

*1 Ketika anda memberdirikan alat penerima, hati-hati untuk tidak merusak sekring di belakang.

PEMASANGAN (BINGKAI-DALAM DASH)

Ilustrasi berikut menunjukkan sebuah tipe pemasangan. Jika anda mempunyai suatu pertanyaan atau informasi yang diperlukan mengenai alat-alat pemasangan, konsultasikan pada penyalur audio mobil JVC atau sebuah perusahaan yang mensuplai alat-alat.

???Jika anda tidak yakin bagaimana memasang alat penerima ini dengan benar, biarkan dipasang dengan teknisi yang berkualitas.

Do the required electrical connections.

Lakukan penyambungan-penyambungan listrik yang diperlukan.

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the sleeve firmly in place.

Bengkokkan pengait-pengait yang tepat untuk menahan selongsong secara kuat pada tempatnya.

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.

Sebelum memindahkan alat penerima, lepaskan seksi belakang.

Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated so that the unit can be removed.

Sisipkan kedua pemegang dan tarik alat penerima seperti yang diilustrasikan hingga alat penerima dapat dipindahkan.

When using the optional stay / Ketika menggunakan penguat tambahan

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Ketika memasang alat penerima tanpa menggunakan selongsong

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.

Dalam sebuah kereta Toyota misalnya, pertama pindahkan radio mobil dan pasang alat penerima tersebut ke dalam tempatnya.

Dashboard

Tempat alat pada bagian depan

Screw (option)

Sekrup (tambahan)

Flat type screws (M5 ??? 8 mm)*2

Sekrup-sekrup tipe rata (M5 ??? 8 mm)*2

Bracket*2

Breket*2

Pocket

Kantong

Bracket*2

Breket*2

*2 Not supplied for this unit.

*2 Tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini.

Flat type screws (M5 ??? 8 mm)*2

Sekrup-sekrup tipe rata (M5 ??? 8 mm)*2

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30??.

Pasang penerima pada suatu sudut kurang dari 30??.

TROUBLESHOOTING

??? The fuse blows.

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

???Power cannot be turned on.

* Is the yellow lead connected?

???No sound from the speakers.

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

??? Sound is distorted.

*Is the speaker output lead grounded?

*Are the ????????? terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

??? Noise interfere with sounds.

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car???s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?

??? This unit becomes hot.

*Is the speaker output lead grounded?

*Are the ????????? terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

??? This unit does not work at all.

* Have you reset your unit?

PEMECAHAN MASALAH

??? Sekring meledak.

* Apakah ujung-ujung merah dan hitam tersambung dengan benar?

??? Power tidak dapat dihidupkan.

* Apakah ujung kuning sudah tersambung?

??? Tidak ada suara dari speaker.

* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker terhubung pendek?

??? Suara terdistorsi.

*Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?

*Apakah terminal-terminal ????????? dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?

??? Berisik yang mengganggu suara-suara.

*Apakah terminal tanahan belakang tersambung ke casis mobil menggunakan kabel-kabel terpendek dan tertebal?

??? Alat penerima menjadi panas.

*Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?

*Apakah terminal-terminal ????????? dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?

??? Alat penerima ini tidak bekerja secara keseluruhan.

* Apakah anda sudah reset (memasang kembali) alat penerima anda?

2

ENGLISH

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

INDONESIA

SAMBUNGAN-SAMBUNGAN LISTRIK

A Typical connections / Ciri khas sambungan-sambungan

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.

1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.

2 Connect the antenna cord.

3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

Sebelum penyambungan: Cek perkabelan dalam mobil dengan hati-hati. Penyambungan yang tidak benar mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan serius pada alat penerima.

Ujung dari kabel power dan beberapa konektor dari bodi mobil mungkin berbeda dalam warna.

1 Sambungkan ujung berwarna dari kabel power dalam urutan spesifikasi pada ilustrasi di bawah.

2 Sambungkan kabel antena.

3 Akhirnya sambungkan dudukan kabel ke alat penerima.

Rear ground terminal

Terminal tanah belakang

Line out (see diagram )

Keluaran (lihat diagram )

To external components (see diagram )

Ke komponen luar (lihat diagram )

*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.

*2 Sebelum pengecekan pengoperasian dari alat penerima ini sebelum pemasangan, ujung ini harus sudah dihubungkan, selain itu power tidak dapat dihidupkan.

15 A fuse

Sekring 15 A

*1 Not supplied for this unit.

*1 Tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima.

Black

Hitam

To metallic body or chassis of the car

Ke besi bodi atau casis dari mobil tersebut

Yellow*2

Kuning*2To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

Ke sebuah tempat terminal dalam blok sekring disambungkan ke baterai mobil (abaikan saklar kontak) (konstant 12 V)

Red

Merah

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

Ke sebuah terminal aksesoris dalam blok sekring

Blue

Biru

To automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)

Ke antena otomatis jika ada (maksimum 250 mA)

Blue with white stripe

Biru dengan strip putih

To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)

Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain (maksimum 200 mA)

Orange with white stripe

Oranye dengan strip putih

To car light control switch

Ke saklar kontrol lampu mobil

Brown

Coklat

To cellular phone system

Ke sistem telepon selular

Ignition switch

Saklar kontak

Fuse block

Blok sekring

3

B Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / Penyambungan penguat eksternal dan/atau subwoofer

You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.

???Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through this unit.

???Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.

Anda dapat menyambungkan penguat untuk meningkatkan sistem stereo mobil anda.

???Sambungkan ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih) ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain sehingga dapat dikontrol melalui alat penerima ini.

???Putuskan sambungan speaker-speaker dari alat penerima ini, sambungkan ini ke penguat. Biarkan ujung speaker dari alat penerima ini tidak digunakan.

Rear speakers

Speaker-speaker

belakang

JVC Amplifier

Penguat JVC

Front speakers

Speaker-speaker

depan

JVC Amplifier

Penguat JVC

Front speakers

Speaker-speaker depan

*4 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

*4 Kabel sinyal (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini)

JVC Amplifier

Penguat JVC

Subwoofer

Subwoofer

*3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car???to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.

*3 Pasangkan dengan kuat kabel tanah ke bodi besi atau ke casis dari mobil???pada tempat yang tidak dilapisi cat (jika dilapisi cat, hilangkan cat sebelum memasang kabel). Kegagalan melakukan ini mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan pada alat penerima tersebut.

C Connecting the external components / Menyambung komponen eksternal

CD changer, Apple iPod??, or JVC D. player / CD changer, Apple iPod?? atau JVC D. player

??? Set ???CHANGER??? for the external input setting (See page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Aturlah ???CHANGER??? untuk pengaturan input eksternal (Lihat halaman 14 dari BUKU PETUNJUK.)

You can connect these components as illustrated below.

The iPod*5 or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)???KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).

Anda bisa menyambungkan komponen-komponen ini seperti yang diilustrasikan di bawah.

iPod*5 atau D. player bisa disambungkan dengan mengunakan adaptor antarmuka (tidak disediakan)???KS-PD100 (untuk iPod) atau KS-PD500 (untuk D. player).

CAUTION / PERINGATAN:

???Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.

???Sebelum menyambungkan komponen eksternal, pastikan bahwa alat penerima sudah dimatikan.

or atau

JVC CD changer

CD changer JVC

CD changer jack

Konektor CD changer

*5 iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

*5 iPod adalah merek dagang dari Apple Computer, Inc., terdaftar di Amerika Serikat dan di negara-negara lain.

Apple iPod (separately purchased)

Apple iPod (dibeli terpisah)

JVC D. player (separately purchased)

JVC D. player (dibeli terpisah)

*6 Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer

*6 Penyambung sinyal disediakan untuk CD changer anda

Other external component / Komponen eksternal lainnya

??? Set ???EXT IN??? for the external input setting (See page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Aturlah ???EXT IN??? untuk pengaturan input eksternal (Lihat halaman 14 dari BUKU PETUNJUK.)

External component

Komponen eksternal

CD changer jack

Komponen eksternal

3.5 mm stereo mini plug

*7 Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)

*7 Adapter Input Saluran KS-U57 (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini)

Steker mini stereo 3.5 mm

*8 AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)

*8 Adapter Input AUX KS-U58 (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini)

4

CD RECEIVER

KD-G724

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

INSTRUCTIONS

GET0356-001A

[UI]

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1.CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2.CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.

3.CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.

4.REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc

???PLEASE??? and ???EJECT??? appear alternately on the display.

???If this does not work, reset your unit.

???Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.

Time countdown indicator

To use these buttons for their original

functions again after pressing MODE, wait for 5 seconds without pressing any of these buttons until the functions mode is cleared or press MODE again.

For safety...

???Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.

???Stop the car before performing any complicated operations.

Warning:

If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved in a traffic accident.

Temperature inside the car...

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes normal before operating the unit.

2

How to read this manual

???Button operations are mainly explained with the illustrations in the table below.

???Some related tips and notes are explained in ???More about this unit??? (see pages 18 ??? 21).

Press briefly.

Press repeatedly.

Press either one.

Press and hold until your desired response begins.

Press and hold both buttons at the same time.

The following marks are used to indicate...

: Built-in CD player operations.

: External CD changer operations. : External USB memory operations.

:Indicator displayed for the corresponding operation.

How to detach/attach the control panel

Detaching...Attaching...

Lever

CAUTION:

The lever comes out if you pressed the 0 button while the panel is detached. If this happens, push the lever back into lock position before attaching the panel.

3

Control panel

Parts identification

Display window

1 BAND button

2??? Control dial

??? (standby/on attenuator) button 3 DISP (display) button

4 Remote sensor

???DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).

5 Display window

6 5(up) / ???(down) buttons

7 EQ (equalizer) button

8 0(eject) button

9 USB (Universal Serial Bus) input terminal p SRC (source) button

q (control panel release) button w SEL (select) button

e MODE button

r MO (monaural) button

tSSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button

y Number buttons u RPT (repeat) button

i RND (random) button o 4/?? buttons

Display window

; Track information indicators???TAG (ID3 Tag), (track/file), (folder)

aTuner reception indicators???ST (stereo), MO (monaural)

s Main display

d Tr (track) indicator

f LOUD (loudness) indicator

g Source display / Volume level indicator h Playback mode / item indicators???

RND (random), (disc),(folder), RPT (repeat)

j Track type indicators*???WMA, MP3

kPlayback source indicators*???

CH: Lights up only when CD-CH is selected as the playback source.

DISC: Lights up for the built-in CD player. l EQ (equalizer) indicator

/Sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer) indicators???USER, ROCK, CLASSIC,

POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ

??? also works as the time countdown indicator and level meter during play (see page 13).

* lights up for the selected item.

4

Installing the lithium coin battery (CR2025)

Aim the remote controller directly at the remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle in between.

Warning:

???Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.

???Store the battery in a place where children cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.

???To prevent the battery from over-heating, cracking, or starting a fire:

???Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.

???Do not leave the battery with other metallic materials.

???Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar tools.

???Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when throwing away or saving it.

Caution:

1 (standby/on/attenuator) button

???Turns the power on if pressed briefly or attenuates the sound when power is on.

???Turns the power off if pressed and held. 2 5U (up) / D (down) ???buttons

???Changes the FM/AM bands with 5U.

???Changes the preset stations with D ???.

???Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA/ USB.

???While playing an MP3 disc on an MP3-compatible CD changer:

???Changes the disc if pressed briefly.

???Changes the folder if pressed and held.

???While listening to an Apple iPod?? or a JVC D. player:

???Pauses/stops or resumes playback with D ???.

???Enter the main menu with 5U. (Now 5U/D ???/2R/F 3work as the

menu selecting buttons.)*

3VOL ??? / VOL + buttons

???Adjusts the volume level. 4 SOUND button

???Selects the sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer).

5SOURCE button

??? Selects the source.

*5U : Returns to the previous menu.

D ??? : Confirms the selection.

Continued on the next page...

5

62 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons

???Searches for stations if pressed briefly.

???Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and held.

???Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.

???While listening to an iPod or a D. player (in menu selecting mode):

???Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press D ??? to confirm the selection.)

???Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.

@Adjust the sound as you want. (See page 12.)

Caution on volume setting:

Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.

Getting started

Basic operations

~ Turn on the power.

??

*You cannot select these sources if they are not ready or not connected.

!For FM/AM tuner

??? Adjust the volume.

Volume level appears.

Volume level indicator

To drop the volume in a moment (ATT)

To restore the sound, press it again.

To turn off the power

Basic settings

???See also ???General settings ??? PSM??? on pages 13 and 14.

1

2

1 Canceling the display demonstrations

Select ???DEMO,??? then ???DEMO OFF.???

2Setting the clock

Select ???CLOCK H??? (hour), then adjust the hour.

Select ???CLOCK M??? (minute), then adjust the minute.

6

3 Finish the procedure.

To check the current clock time while the power is turned off

To check other information while listening to the radio

Clock =Station name*

=Frequency =(back to the beginning)

*FM/AM: If no name is assigned to a station, ???NO NAME??? appears. To assign a title to a station, see page 15.

To tune in to a station manually

In step ! on the left...

1

2 Select a desired station frequency.

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive

Radio operations

~

Lights up when monaural mode is activated.

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure. ???MONO OFF??? appears and the MO indicator goes off.

Lights up when receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength.

Selected band appears.

!Start searching for a station.

When a station is received, searching stops.

To stop searching, press the same button again.

Storing stations in memory

You can preset six stations for each band.

FM station automatic presetting??? SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)

1Select the FM band (FM1 ??? FM3) you want to store into.

2

7

3

???SSM??? appears, then disappears when automatic presetting is over.

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are searched and stored automatically in the FM band.

Manual presetting

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number 4 of the FM1 band.

1

2

Listening to a preset station

1

2Select the preset station (1 ??? 6) you want.

or

Disc/USB memory operations

Playing a disc in the unit

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.

To stop play and eject the disc

Playing discs in the CD changer

All discs in the magazine will be played repeatedly until you change the source.

??? Ejecting the magazine will also stop playing.

~

* If you have changed the external input setting to ???EXT IN??? (see page 14), you cannot select the CD changer.

??Select a disc.

For disc number from 01 ??? 06:

For disc number from 07 ??? 12:

8

Playing from a USB memory

This unit can play MP3/WMA tracks stored in a USB memory.

All tracks in the USB memory will be played repeatedly until you change the source.

???Removing the USB memory will also stop playback.

~

USB memory

If a USB memory has been attached...

About MP3 and WMA tracks

MP3 and WMA ???tracks??? (words ???file??? and ???track??? are used interchangeably) are recorded in ???folders.???

About the CD changer

It is recommended to use a JVC MP3- compatible CD changer with your unit.

???You can also connect MP3-incompatible CD changers. However, these units are not compatible with MP3 discs.

???You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.

???You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD changer.

???Disc text information recorded in the CD Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text compatible CD changer is connected.

???For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume).

To fast-forward or reverse the track

To go to the next or previous tracks

Playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.

???If a different USB memory is currently attached, playback starts from the beginning.

To detach the USB memory, straightly pull it out from the unit.

Cautions:

???Avoid using the USB memory if it might hinder your safety driving.

???Make sure all important data has been backed up to avoid losing the data.

Continued on the next page...

9

To go to the next or previous folders (only for MP3/WMA/USB)

For MP3 tracks: For WMA tracks:

Other main functions

Skipping tracks quickly during play

Only possible on JVC

MP3-compatible CD changer

To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder (for MP3/WMA/USB) directly

To select a number from 01 ??? 06:

To select a number from 07 ??? 12:

???To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA/ USB, it is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their folder names???01, 02, 03, and so on.

To select a particular track in a folder (for MP3/WMA/USB):

???For MP3/WMA/USB, you can skip tracks within the same folder.

Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track whose number is a single digit (1 to 9)

1

2

Each time you press the button, you can skip 10 tracks.

???After the last track, the first track will be selected and vice versa.

3

Prohibiting disc ejection

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure.

10

You can use only one of the following playback modes at a time.

1

While playing an audio CD or a CD Text

2 Select your desired playback mode.

7 Repeat play

While playing an MP3/WMA*2 disc or

USB memory

???When ???TAG DISP??? is set to ???TAG ON??? (see page 14)

???When ???TAG DISP??? is set to ???TAG OFF???

: Clock with the current track number

: Elapsed playing time with the current track number

*1 If the current disc is an audio CD, ???NO NAME??? appears.

*2 Only for the built-in CD player and external USB memory.

*3 If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information, folder name and file name appear. In this case, the TAG indicator will not light up.

TRK RPT : The current track.

FLDR RPT*4 : All tracks of the current folder.

DISC RPT*5 : All tracks of the current disc.

RPT OFF : Cancels.

7 Random play

Mode Plays at random

FLDR RND*4 : All tracks of the current folder, then tracks of the next folder and so on.

*4 Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/ USB).

*5 Only while playing discs in the CD changer.

11

Sound adjustments

You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre (C-EQ: custom equalizer).

Adjusting the sound

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your preference.

1

2

Indication [Range]

BAS*1 (bass)

Adjust the bass. [???06 to +06]

TRE*1 (treble)

Adjust the treble. [???06 to +06]

FAD*2 (fader)

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance. [R06 to F06]

BAL (balance)

Adjust the left and right speaker balance. [L06 to R06]

LOUD*1 (loudness)

Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced sound at low volume level. [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]

SUB.W*3 (subwoofer)

Adjust the subwoofer output level. [00 to 08]

VOL (volume)

Adjust the volume. [00 to 30 or 50*4]

*1 When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness, the adjustment you have made is stored for the currently selected sound mode (C-EQ) including ???USER.???

*2 If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to ???00.???

*3 This takes effect only when a subwoofer is connected.

*4 Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See page 14 for details.)

Indication pattern changes as you adjust the level.

Ex.: When ???TRE??? is selected

12

General settings ??? PSM

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items listed in the table that follows.

???If CD, CD changer, or USB memory has been selected as the source, playback pauses during telephone muting.

??? Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of the setting.

Continued on the next page...

13

*1 Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display. *2 Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected???FM, AM, CD or USB.

14

Title assignment

2Move to the next (or previous) character position.

You can assign titles to station frequencies and CDs (both in this unit and the CD changer).

*You cannot assign a title to a CD Text or an MP3/WMA disc or a USB memory.

1Select the sources.

???For FM/AM tuner: Select a station.

???For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.

???For CDs in the CD changer: Select ???CD-CH,??? then select a disc number.

2 Enter the title assignment mode.

Ex.: When you select ???CD??? as the source

3Assign a title.

1 Select a character.

3Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish entering the title.

4 Finish the procedure.

To erase the entire title

In step 2 on the left...

15

iPod??/D. player operations

This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod or a JVC D. player from the control panel.

Before operating your iPod or D. player: Connect either one of the following (separately purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear of this unit.

???Interface adapter for iPod?????KS-PD100 for controlling an iPod.

???D. player interface adapter???KS-PD500 for controlling a D. player.

???For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume).

???For details, refer also to the manual supplied with the interface adapter.

Caution:

Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the vehicle???s ignition switch before connecting or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.

Preparations:

Make sure ???CHANGER??? is selected for the external input setting, see page 14.

~

??

Playback starts automatically from where it has been paused*1 or stopped*2 previously.

! Adjust the volume.

???Adjust the sound as you want. (See page 12.)

??? Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or D. player is deactivated.

To pause*1 or stop*2 playback

To resume playback, press it again.

To fast-forward or reverse the track

To go to the next or previous tracks

*1 For iPod

*2 For D. player

Selecting a track from the menu

1 Enter the main menu.

Now the 5/???/ 4/??buttons work as the menu selecting buttons*3.

2 Select the desired menu.

For iPod:

PLAYLIST ??ARTISTS ??ALBUMS ??SONGS ??GENRES ??COMPOSER ??(back to the

beginning)

For D. player:

PLAYLIST ??ARTIST ??ALBUM ??GENRE

??TRACK ??(back to the beginning)

16

3 Confirm the selection.

To move back to the previous menu, press 5.

???If a track is selected, playback starts automatically.

???If the selected item has another layer, you will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the desired track is played.

???Holding 4/?? can skip 10 items at a time.

*3 The menu selecting mode will be canceled:

???If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.

???When you confirm the selection of a track.

7 Random play

ALBM RND*4

Functions the same as ???Shuffle Albums??? of the iPod.

SONG RND/RND ON

Functions the same as ???Shuffle Songs??? of the iPod or ???Random Play =On??? of the D. player.

RND OFF

Cancels.

*4 For iPod: Only if you select ???ALL??? in ???ALBUMS??? of the main ???MENU.???

Selecting the playback modes

1

2 Select your desired playback mode.

7 Repeat play

ONE RPT

Functions the same as ???Repeat One??? of the iPod or ???Repeat Mode =One??? for the D. player.

ALL RPT

Functions the same as ???Repeat All??? of the iPod or ???Repeat Mode =All??? for the D. player.

RPT OFF

Cancels.

To check other information while listening to an iPod or a D. player

17

Other external component operations

You can connect an external component to the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input Adapter???KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX Input Adapter???KS-U58 (not supplied).

???For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume).

For listening to the the USB memory, see pages 9 ??? 11; For iPod, or D.player, see pages 16 and 17.

~

If ???EXT IN??? does not appear, see page 14 and select the external input (???EXT IN???).

??Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

! Adjust the volume.

???Adjust the sound as you want. (See page 12.)

To check other information while listening to an external component

Clock ??EXT IN

More about this unit

Basic operations

Turning on the power

???By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.

Turning off the power

???If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc play will start from where playback has been stopped previously, next time you turn on the power.

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

???During SSM search...

???All previously stored stations are erased and stations are stored newly.

???Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).

???When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.

???When storing a station manually, the previously preset station is erased when a new station is stored in the same preset number.

Disc operations

Caution for DualDisc playback

???The Non-DVD side of a ???DualDisc??? does not comply with the ???Compact Disc Digital Audio??? standard. Therefore, the use of Non- DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may not be recommended.

General

???This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/ CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA formats.

Inserting a disc

???Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into the loading slot.

18

???When a disc is inserted upside down, ???PLEASE??? and ???EJECT??? appear alternately on the display. Press 0to eject the disc.

Playing a disc

???While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

???Use only ???finalized??? CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

???This unit can play back only files of the same type which are first detected if a disc includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/ WMA files.

???This unit can play back multi-session discs; however, unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.

???Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the following reasons:

???Discs are dirty or scratched.

???Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside the unit.

???The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

???CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with ???Packet Write??? method.

???There are improper recording conditions (missing data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched, warped, etc.).

???CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.

???Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

???Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck to the surface.

???Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an ink jet printer.

Using these discs under high temperatures or high humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the unit.

Playing an MP3/WMA disc

???This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the letter case???upper/lower).

???This unit can show the names of albums, artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.

???This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other characters can be correctly displayed.

???This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the conditions below:

???Bit rate: 8 kbps ??? 320 kbps

???Sampling frequency:

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1) 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)

???Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name

???The maximum number of characters for file/ folder names vary among the disc format used (includes 4 extension characters???<.mp3> or <.wma>).

???ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

???ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

???Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters

???Joliet*: up to 64 (36)characters

???Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72)

characters

*The parenthetic figure is the maximum number of characters for file/folder names in case the total number of files and folders is 313 or more.

???This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time. Especially, after performing the search function, this difference becomes noticeable.

???This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.

???This unit cannot play back the following files:

??? MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.

??? MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.

??? MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

??? WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and voice format.

??? WMA files which are not based upon Windows Media?? Audio.

Continued on the next page...

19

???WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

???Files which have the data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.

???The search function works but search speed is not constant.

Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB memory

???While playing from a USB memory, the playback order may differ from other players.

???This unit may be unable to play back some USB memories or some files due to their characteristics or recording conditions.

???Depending on the shape of the USB memories and connection ports, some USB memories may not be attached properly or the connection might be loose.

???It is not recommended to use a USB memory wider than 20 mm as it will block you from pressing the 0 button.

???If the connected USB memory does not have the correct files, ???NO FILES??? appears and the unit returns to the previous source.

???This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.

???This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the conditions below:

???Bit rate:

MP3: 32 kbps ??? 320 kbps (MPEG-1)

8 kbps ??? 160 kbps (MPEG-2/2.5) WMA:5 kbps ??? 320 kbps

???Sampling frequency:

MP3: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, (MPEG-1) 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz, (MPEG-2) 12 kHz, 11.025 - 8 kHz, (MPEG-2.5)

WMA:8 kHz ??? 48 kHz

???This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in VBR (variable bit rate).

???The maximum number of characters for folder and file names is 25 characters; 128 characters for MP3/WMA tag information.

???This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files and 250 folders (999 files per folder).

???This unit cannot play back the following files:

???MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.

???MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.

???MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

Changing the source

???If you change the source, playback also stops. Next time you select the same source again, playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.

Ejecting a disc

???If the ejected disc is not removed within

15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted again into the loading slot to protect it from dust. (Disc will not play this time.)

General settings???PSM

??????AUTO??? setting for ???DIMMER??? may not work correctly on some vehicles, particularly on those having a control dial for dimming. In this case, change the ???DIMMER??? setting to any other than ???AUTO.???

???If you change the ???AMP GAIN??? setting from ???HIGH PWR??? to ???LOW PWR??? while the volume level is set higher than ???VOL 30,??? the unit automatically changes the volume level to ???VOL 30.???

Title assignment

???If you try to assign titles to more than 30 station frequencies or 30 discs, ???NAMEFULL??? appears. Delete unwanted titles before assignment.

???Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can also be shown if you play back the disc from the unit and vice versa.

iPod?? or D. player operations

???When you turn on this unit, the iPod or

D.player is charged through this unit.

???While the iPod or D. player is connected to this unit, all operations from the iPod or

D.player are disabled. Perform all operations from this unit.

???The text information may not be displayed correctly.

??? Some characters such as accented letters cannot be shown correctly on the display.

20

???Depends on the condition of communication between the iPod or D. player and the unit.

???If the text information includes more than 8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see also page 13). This unit can display up to 40 characters.

Notice:

When operating an iPod or a D. player, some operations may not be performed correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the following JVC web site:

For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/ english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>

For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/ english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>

Maintenance

How to clean the connectors

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.

Connector

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the CD player in the following cases:

???After starting the heater in the car.

???If it becomes very humid inside the car. Should this occur, the CD player may malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until the moisture evaporates.

How to handle discs

???Always hold the disc by the

edges. Do not touch its recording surface.

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the disc around the center holder (with the printed surface facing up).

???Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.

To keep discs clean

A dirty disc may not play correctly. If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to edge.

???Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean discs.

To play new discs

New discs may have some rough spots around the inner and outer edges. If such a disc is used, this unit may reject the disc.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Do not use the following discs:

Warped disc

21

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.

FM/AM General

Disc playback

MP3/WMA playback

???Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. ??? Stop playback while driving on rough roads.

???Change the disc.

???Check the cords and connections.

22

MP3/WMA playback

USB memory playback

Continued on the next page...

23

CD changer

iPod/D. player playback

???Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

???iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

24

Specifications

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION

Maximum Power Output: Front: 50 W per channel Rear: 50 W per channel

Continuous Power Output (RMS):

Front: 19 W per channel into 4 ???, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion.

Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 ???, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion.

Load Impedance: 4 ??? (4 ??? to 8 ??? allowance) Tone Control Range:

Bass: ??10 dB at 100 Hz

Treble: ??10 dB at 10 kHz Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB

Line-Out Level/Impedance:

2.5 V/20 k??? load (full scale) Output Impedance: 1 k??? Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:

2.0 V/20 k??? load (full scale) Other Terminal: CD changer

TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range:

FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz

[FM Tuner]

Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 ??V/75 ???) 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

16.3 dBf (1.8 ??V/75 ???)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

Stereo Separation: 30 dB

[AM Tuner]

Sensitivity: 20 ??V

Selectivity: 35 dB

CD PLAYER/USB MEMORY SECTION

Type: Compact disc player

Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)

Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit MP3 Decoding Format:

MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3 Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps

WMA (Windows Media?? Audio) Decoding Format:

Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps Playable USB memory:

Format: FAT 12/16/32

Storage: Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)

Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA

Max. Current: Less than 500 mA

GENERAL

Power Requirement: Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance) Grounding System: Negative ground Allowable Operating Temperature:

0??C to +40??C Dimensions (W ?? H ?? D):

Installation Size (approx.):

182 mm ?? 52 mm ?? 152 mm Panel Size (approx.):

188 mm ?? 58 mm ?? 11 mm Mass (approx.):

1.4 kg (excluding accessories)

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

25

Having TROUBLE with operation?

Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

Heat sink

KD-G724

Installation/Connection Manual

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.

WARNINGS

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery???s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before installing the unit.

??? Be sure to ground this unit to the car???s chassis again after installation.

Notes:

???Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio dealers.

???It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 ??? to 8 ???). If the maximum power is less than

50 W, change ???AMP GAIN??? setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 14 of the

INSTRUCTIONS).

???To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.

??? The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:

???DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.

???BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealers or a company supplying kits.

??? If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.

*1 When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.

Do the required electrical connections.

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the sleeve firmly in place.

Removing the unit

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.

Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated so that the unit can be removed.

TROUBLESHOOTING

??? The fuse blows.

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

???Power cannot be turned on.

* Is the yellow lead connected?

???No sound from the speakers.

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

??? Sound is distorted.

*Is the speaker output lead grounded?

*Are the ????????? terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

??? Noise interfere with sounds.

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car???s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?

??? This unit becomes hot.

*Is the speaker output lead grounded?

*Are the ????????? terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

??? This unit does not work at all.

* Have you reset your unit?

When using the optional stay

Stay (option)

Fire wall

Dashboard

Screw (option)

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30??.

1

When installing the unit without using the sleeve

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.

*2 Not supplied for this unit.

Flat type screws (M5 ??? 8 mm)*2

Bracket*2

Note : When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are used, they could damage the unit.

Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A Typical connections

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit. The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.

1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.

2 Connect the antenna cord.

3

Rear ground terminal

Line out (see diagram )

To external components (see diagram )

*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.

15 A fuse

Black

Yellow *2

Red

Blue

Blue with white stripe

Orange with white stripe

Brown

*1 Not supplied for this unit.

Ignition switch

To metallic body or chassis of the car

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

Fuse block

To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)

To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)

To car light control switch

To cellular phone system

You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.

???Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through this unit.

???Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.

Rear speakers

JVC Amplifier

Front speakers

JVC Amplifier

C Connecting the external components

CD changer, Apple iPod??, or JVC D. player

??? Set ???CHANGER??? for the external input setting (See page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)

You can connect these components as illustrated below. The iPod*5 or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)???KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).

Apple iPod (separately purchased)

or

JVC D. player (separately purchased)

CAUTION:

???Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.

*5 iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

JVC CD changer

CD changer jack

*6 Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer

Other external component

??? Set ???EXT IN??? for the external input setting (See page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)

External component

component

*7 Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)

3.5 mm stereo mini plug

*8 AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)

2

CD RECEIVER

RECEPTEUR CD

KD-G722/KD-G721

FRAN??AIS ENGLISH

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 7.

Pour annuler la d??monstration des affichages, r??f??rez-vous ?? la page 7.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

Pour l???installation et les raccordements, se r??f??rer au manuel s??par??.

INSTRUCTIONS

MANUEL D???INSTRUCTIONS

GET0357-003A

[EX/EU]

ENGLISH

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1.CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2.CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.

3.CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.

4.REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

How to reset your unit

??? Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc

???PLEASE??? and ???EJECT??? appear alternately on the display.

???If this does not work, reset your unit.

???Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.

How to use the MODE button

If you press MODE, the unit goes into functions mode, then the number buttons and 5/??? buttons work as different function buttons.

Ex.: When number button 2 works as MO (monaural) button.

Time countdown indicator

To use these buttons for their original

functions again after pressing MODE, wait for 5 seconds without pressing any of these buttons until the functions mode is cleared or press MODE again.

Note: Only for [EX] model users in UK and European countries

For security reasons, a numbered ID card is provided with this unit, and the same ID number is imprinted on the unit???s chassis.

Keep the card in a safe place, as it will help the authorities to identify your unit if stolen.

2

How to read this manual

???Button operations are mainly explained with the illustrations in the table below.

???Some related tips and notes are explained in ???More about this unit??? (see pages 22 ??? 25).

Press briefly.

Press repeatedly.

Press either one.

Press and hold until your desired response begins.

Press and hold both buttons at the same time.

The following marks are used to indicate...

: Built-in CD player operations.

: External CD changer operations. : External USB memory operations.

: Indicator displayed for the corresponding operation.

Warning:

If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved in a traffic accident.

Caution on volume setting:

Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.

CONTENTS

For safety...

???Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.

???Stop the car before performing any complicated operations.

Temperature inside the car...

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes normal before operating the unit.

3

ENGLISH

Control panel ??? KD-G722 and KD-G721

Parts identification

How to detach/attach the control panel

Detaching...Attaching...

Lever

CAUTION:

The lever comes out if you pressed the 0button while the panel is detached. If this happens, push the lever back into lock position before attaching the panel.

4

Display window

ENGLISH

a Track information indicators???TAG (ID3 Tag), (track/file), (folder)

s Tuner reception indicators???ST (stereo), MO (monaural)

d RDS indicators???TP, PTY, AF, REG f Main display

g Tr (track) indicator

h LOUD (loudness) indicator

j Source display / Volume level indicator

kPlayback mode / item indicators??? RND (random), (disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)

l Tracks type indicators*???WMA, MP3 / Playback source indicators*???CH (CD changer), DISC (built-in CD player)

z EQ (equalizer) indicator

xSound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer) indicators???USER, ROCK, CLASSIC,

POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ

???also works as the time countdown indicator and level meter during play (see page 17).

* lights up for the selected item.

Remote controller ??? RM-RK50

Aim the remote controller directly at the remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle in between.

The unit is equipped with the steering wheel remote control function.

???See the Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume) for connection.

Continued on the next page

5

Main elements and features

1 (standby/on/attenuator) button

???Turns the power on if pressed briefly or attenuates the sound when the power is on.

???Turns the power off if pressed and held. 2 5U (up) / D (down) ???buttons

???Changes the FM/AM/DAB bands with 5U.

???Changes the preset stations (or services) with D ???.

???Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA/ USB.

???While playing an MP3 disc on an MP3-compatible CD changer:

???Changes the disc if pressed briefly.

???Changes the folder if pressed and held.

???While listening to an Apple iPod?? or a JVC D. player:

???Pauses/stops or resumes playback with D ???.

???Enter the main menu with 5U. (Now 5U/D ???/2R/F 3work as the

menu selecting buttons.)*

3VOL ??? / VOL + buttons

???Adjusts the volume level. 4 SOUND button

???Selects the sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer).

5 SOURCE button

??? Selects the source.

62R (reverse) / F (forward) 3buttons

???Searches for stations (or services) if pressed briefly.

???Searches for ensembles if pressed and held.

???Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and held.

???Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.

???While listening to an iPod or a D. player (in menu selecting mode):

???Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press D ???to confirm the selection.)

???Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.

*5U : Returns to the previous menu.

D ??? : Confirms the selection.

6

Getting started

Basic operations

~ Turn on the power.

??

*You cannot select these sources if they are not ready or not connected.

!

For FM/AM tuner

For DAB tuner

??? Adjust the volume.

Volume level appears.

Volume level indicator

@Adjust the sound as you want. (See page 15.)

Basic settings

???See also ???General settings ??? PSM??? on pages 16 ??? 18.

1

2

1 Canceling the display demonstrations

Select ???DEMO,??? then ???DEMO OFF.???

2Setting the clock

Select ???CLOCK H??? (hour), then adjust the hour.

Select ???CLOCK M??? (minute), then adjust the minute.

Select ???24H/12H,??? then ???24H??? (hour) or ???12H??? (hour).

3 Finish the procedure.

To check the current clock time while the power is turned off

7

ENGLISH

Radio operations

~

??

Lights up when receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength.

Selected band appears.

!Start searching for a station.

When a station is received, searching stops.

To stop searching, press the same button again.

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive

Lights up when monaural mode is activated.

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure. ???MONO OFF??? appears and the MO indicator goes off.

Storing stations in memory

You can preset six stations for each band.

FM station automatic presetting??? SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)

1Select the FM band (FM1 ??? FM3) you want to store into.

To tune in to a station manually

In step ! above...

1

2 Select a desired station frequency.

2

3

???SSM??? appears, then disappears when automatic presetting is over.

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are searched and stored automatically in the FM band.

8

Manual presetting

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number 4 of the FM1 band.

2

Listening to a preset station

1

2Select the preset station (1 ??? 6) you want.

To check the current clock time while listening to an FM (non-RDS) or AM station

??? For FM RDS stations, see page 11.

Frequency ??Clock

FM RDS operations

???Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the following)

???TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY Standby Receptions (see pages 10 and 16)

???Tracing the same programme automatically ???Network-Tracking Reception (see page 11)

???Programme Search (see page 17)

Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme

You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favorite programme by searching for a PTY code.

???To store your favorite programme types, see page 10.

??Select one of your favorite programme types.

or

Select one of the PTY codes (see page 10).

Continued on the next page

9

If there is a station broadcasting a programme of the same PTY code as you have selected, that station is tuned in.

PTY codes

NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE, SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS, OTHER M (music),

WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music), OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT

Storing your favorite programme types

You can store six favorite programme types.

Preset programme types in the number buttons (1 to 6):

1 Select a PTY code (see page 9).

2Select the preset number (1 ??? 6) you want to store into.

4 Finish the procedure.

Using the standby receptions

TA Standby Reception

TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any source other than AM.

The volume changes to the preset TA volume level if the current level is lower than the preset level (see page 17).

To activate TA Standby Reception

The TP (Traffic Programme) indicator either lights up or flashes.

???If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby Reception is activated.

???If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby Reception is not yet activated. (This occurs when you are listening to an FM station without the RDS signals required for TA Standby Reception.)

To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in to another station providing these signals. The TP indicator will stop flashing and remain lit.

To deactivate the TA Standby Reception

The TP indicator goes off.

Ex.: When ???ROCK M??? is selected

3Repeat steps 1 and 2 to store other PTY codes into other preset numbers.

PTY Standby Reception

PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch temporarily to your favorite PTY programme from any source other than AM.

To activate and select your favorite PTY code

for PTY Standby Reception, see page 16. The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.

???If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby Reception is activated.

10

???If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is not yet activated.

To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in to another station providing these signals. The PTY indicator will stop flashing and remain lit.

To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception,

select ???OFF??? for the PTY code (see page 16). The PTY indicator goes off.

Tracing the same programme??? Network-Tracking Reception

When driving in an area where FM reception is not sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to another FM RDS station of the same network, possibly broadcasting the same programme with stronger signals (see the illustration below).

When shipped from the factory, Network- Tracking Reception is activated.

To change the Network-Tracking Reception

setting, see ???AF-REG??? on page 16.

Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas (01 ??? 05)

Disc/USB memory

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.

To stop play and eject the disc

Playing discs in the CD changer

All discs in the magazine will be played repeatedly until you change the source.

??? Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.

~

??

To check the current clock time while listening to an FM RDS station

*If you have changed the external input setting to ???EXT IN??? (see page 17), you cannot select the CD changer.

Select a disc.

For disc number from 01 ??? 06:

For disc number from 07 ??? 12:

Station name (PS) =Station Frequency =

Programme type (PTY) =Clock =(back to the

beginning)

Continued on the next page

11

USB memory

If a USB memory has been attached...

Playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.

???If a different USB memory is currently attached, playback starts from the beginning.

To eject the USB memory, straightly pull it out from the unit.

Cautions:

???Avoid using the USB memory if it might hinder your safety driving.

???Make sure all important data has been backed up to avoid losing the data.

About MP3 and WMA tracks

MP3 and WMA ???tracks??? (words ???file??? and ???track??? are used interchangeably) are recorded in ???folders.???

About the CD changer

It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.

???You can also connect MP3-incompatible CD changers. However, these units are not compatible with MP3 discs.

???You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.

???You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD changer.

???Disc text information recorded in the CD Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text compatible CD changer is connected.

???For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume).

To fast-forward or reverse the track

To go to the next or previous tracks

To go to the next or previous folders (only for MP3/WMA/USB)

For MP3 tracks: For WMA tracks:

12

To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder (for MP3/ WMA/USB) directly

To select a number from 01 ??? 06:

2

Each time you press the button, you can skip 10 tracks.

???After the last track, the first track will be selected and vice versa.

ENGLISH

To select a number from 07 ??? 12:

???To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA/ USB, it is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their folder names???01, 02, 03, and so on.

To select a particular track in a folder (for MP3/WMA/USB):

Other main functions

Skipping tracks quickly during play

Only possible on JVC

MP3-compatible CD changer

???For MP3/WMA/USB, you can skip tracks within the same folder.

Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track whose number is a single digit (1 to 9)

1

3

Prohibiting disc ejection

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure.

13

ENGLISH

Changing the display information

While playing an audio CD or a CD Text

While playing an MP3/WMA*2 disc or a

USB memory

???When ???TAG DISP??? is set to ???TAG ON??? (see page 18)

??? When ???TAG DISP??? is set to ???TAG OFF???

: Elapsed playing time with the current track number

: Clock with the current track number

*1 If the current disc is an audio CD, ???NO NAME??? appears.

*2 Only for the built-in CD player and external USB memory.

*3 If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information, folder name and file name appear. In this case, the TAG indicator will not light up.

Selecting the playback modes

You can use only one of the following playback modes at a time.

1

2Select your desired playback mode.

7 Repeat play

7 Random play

*4 Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/ USB).

*5 Only while playing discs in the CD changer.

14

Sound adjustments

You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre (C-EQ: custom equalizer).

1

2

Adjusting the sound

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your preference.

1

2

Indication pattern changes as you adjust the level.

Indication, [Range]

BAS*1 (bass), [???06 to +06]

Adjust the bass.

TRE*1 (treble), [???06 to +06]

Adjust the treble.

FAD*2 (fader), [R06 to F06]

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.

BAL (balance), [L06 to R06]

Adjust the left and right speaker balance.

LOUD*1 (loudness), [LOUD ON or

LOUD OFF]

Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced sound at low volume level.

SUB.W*3 (subwoofer), [00 to 08]

Adjust the subwoofer output level.

VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50*4]

Adjust the volume.

*1 When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness, the adjustment you have made is stored for the currently selected sound mode (C-EQ) including ???USER.???

*2 If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to ???00.???

*3 This takes effect only when a subwoofer is connected.

*4 Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See page 18 for details.)

ENGLISH

Ex.: When ???TRE??? is selected

15

General settings ??? PSM

ENGLISH

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items listed in the table that follows.

1

2 Select a PSM item.

3 Adjust the PSM item selected.

4Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other PSM items if necessary.

5 Finish the procedure.

16

*1 Depends on the amplifier gain control (see page 18). *2 Displayed only when DAB tuner is connected.

*3 Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display. *4 Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected???FM, AM, CD, or USB.

Continued on the next page

ENGLISH

17

ENGLISH

Title assignment

You can assign titles to CDs (both in the unit and the CD changer). You can assign up to 30 discs and each title up to 32 characters.

???You cannot assign a title to a CD Text, an MP3/WMA disc, or a USB memory.

1Select the sources.

???For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.

???For CDs in the CD changer: Select ???CD-CH,??? then select a disc number.

2 Enter the title assignment mode.

Ex.: When ???CD??? is selected as the source

3Assign a title.

1 Select a character.

2Move to the next (or previous) character position.

3Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish entering the title.

4 Finish the procedure.

To erase the entire title

In step 2 on the left...

Available characters

18

iPod??/D. player operations

This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod or a JVC D. player from the control panel.

Before operating your iPod or D. player: Connect either one of the following (separately purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear of this unit.

???Interface adapter for iPod?????KS-PD100 for controlling an iPod.

???D. player interface adapter???KS-PD500 for controlling a D. player.

???For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume).

???For details, refer also to the manual supplied with the interface adapter.

Caution:

Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the vehicle???s ignition switch before connecting or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.

Preparations:

Make sure ???CHANGER??? is selected for the external input setting, see page 17.

~

??

Playback starts automatically from where it has been paused*1 or stopped*2 previously.

! Adjust the volume.

To pause*1 or stop*2 playback

To resume playback, press it again.

To fast-forward or reverse the track

To go to the next or previous tracks

*1 For iPod

*2 For D. player

Selecting a track from the menu

1 Enter the main menu.

Now the 5/???/ 4/??buttons work as the menu selecting buttons*3.

*3 The menu selecting mode will be canceled:

???If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.

???When you confirm the selection of a track.

Continued on the next page

19

ENGLISH

2 Select the desired menu.

For iPod:

PLAYLIST ??ARTISTS ??ALBUMS ??SONGS ??GENRES ??COMPOSER ??(back to the

beginning)

For D. player:

PLAYLIST ??ARTIST ??ALBUM ??GENRE

??TRACK ??(back to the beginning)

3 Confirm the selection.

To move back to the previous menu, press 5.

???If a track is selected, playback starts automatically.

???If the selected item has another layer, you will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the desired track is played.

???Holding 4/?? can skip 10 items at a time.

7 Random play

ALBM RND*

Functions the same as ???Shuffle Albums??? of the iPod.

SONG RND/RND ON

Functions the same as ???Shuffle Songs??? of the iPod or ???Random Play =On??? of the D. player.

RND OFF

Cancels.

*For iPod: Only if you select ???ALL??? in ???ALBUMS??? of the main ???MENU.???

To check other information while listening to an iPod or a D. player

Selecting the playback modes

1

2 Select your desired playback mode.

7 Repeat play

ONE RPT

Functions the same as ???Repeat One??? of the iPod or ???Repeat Mode =One??? for the D. player.

ALL RPT

Functions the same as ???Repeat All??? of the iPod or ???Repeat Mode =All??? for the D. player.

RPT OFF

Cancels.

Other external component operations

You can connect an external component to the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input Adapter???KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX Input Adapter???KS-U58 (not supplied).

???For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume).

For listening to the USB memory, see pages

12 ??? 14; For iPod or D. player, see pages 19 ??? 20.

~

If ???EXT IN??? does not appear, see page 17 and select the external input (???EXT IN???).

20

??Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

! Adjust the volume.

???Adjust the sound as you want. (See page 15.)

To check the current clock time while listening to an external component

EXT IN ??Clock

DAB tuner operations

What is DAB system?

Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB) can deliver digital quality sound without any annoying interference and signal distortion. Furthermore, it can carry text, pictures, and data. When transmitting, DAB combines several programmes (called ???services???) to form one ???ensemble.??? In addition, each ???service?????? called ???primary service??????can also be divided into its components (called ???secondary service???). A typical ensemble has six or more programmes (services) broadcast at the same time.

By connecting the DAB tuner, this unit can do the following:

???Tracing the same programme automatically ???Alternative Frequency Reception (see ???DAB AF??? on page 17).

It is recommended to use DAB tuner KT-DB1000 with your unit. If you have another DAB tuner, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.

???Refer also to the Instructions supplied for your DAB tuner.

~

When an ensemble is received, searching stops.

To stop searching, press the same button again.

???Select a service (either primary or secondary) to listen to.

To tune in to an ensemble manually

Start searching for an ensemble, as in step !

above...

1

2 Select a desired ensemble frequency.

Storing DAB services in memory

You can preset six DAB services (primary) for each band.

1 Select a service you want (see above).

Continued on the next page

21

2Select the preset number (1 ??? 6) you want to store into.

ENGLISH

Preset number flashes for a while.

Tuning in to a preset DAB service

2Select the preset DAB service (primary) number (1 ??? 6) you want.

If the selected primary service has some secondary services, pressing the same button again will tune in to the secondary services.

When shipped from the factory, Alternative Frequency Reception is activated.

To deactivate the Alternative Frequency Reception, see page 17.

To change the display information while tuning to an ensemble

Service name =Ensemble name =Channel number =Frequency =Clock =(back to the beginning)

More about this unit

Basic operations

Turning on the power

???By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.

Turning off the power

???If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc play will start from where playback has been stopped previously, next time you turn on the power.

Tracing the same programme??? Alternative Frequency Reception

You can keep listening to the same programme by activating the Alternative Frequency Reception.

???While receiving a DAB service:

When driving in an area where a service cannot be received, this unit automatically tunes in to another ensemble or FM RDS station, broadcasting the same programme.

???While receiving an FM RDS station:

When driving in an area where a DAB service is broadcasting the same programme as the FM RDS station is broadcasting, this unit automatically tunes in to the DAB service.

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

???During SSM search...

???All previously stored stations are erased and stations are stored newly.

???Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).

???When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.

???When storing a station manually, the previously preset station is erased when a new station is stored in the same preset number.

22

FM RDS operations

???Network-Tracking Reception requires two types of RDS signals???PI (Programme Identification) and AF (Alternative Frequency) to work correctly. Without receiving these data correctly, Network-

Tracking Reception will not operate correctly.

???If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby Reception, the volume level automatically changes to the preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower than the preset level.

???When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated (with AF selected), Network- Tracking Reception is also activated

automatically. On the other hand, Network- Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated without deactivating Alternative Frequency Reception. (See page 16.)

???If you want to know more about RDS, visit ??http://www.rds.org.uk??.

Disc operations

Caution for DualDisc playback

???The Non-DVD side of a ???DualDisc??? does not comply with the ???Compact Disc Digital Audio??? standard. Therefore, the use of Non- DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may not be recommended.

General

???This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/ CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3, and WMA formats.

Inserting a disc

???When a disc is inserted upside down, ???PLEASE??? and ???EJECT??? appear alternately on the display. Press 0to eject the disc.

???Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into the loading slot.

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

???Use only ???finalized??? CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

???This unit can play back only files of the same type which are first detected if a disc includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/ WMA files.

???This unit can play back multi-session discs; however, unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.

???Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the following reasons:

???Discs are dirty or scratched.

???Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside the unit.

???The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

???CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with ???Packet Write??? method.

???There are improper recording conditions (missing data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched, warped, etc.).

???CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.

???Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

???Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck to the surface.

???Discs on which labels can be directly

printed by an ink jet printer.

Using these discs under high temperatures or high humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the unit.

Playing an MP3/WMA disc

???This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the letter case???upper/lower).

???This unit can show the names of albums, artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.

???This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other characters can be correctly displayed.

ENGLISH

Playing a disc

??? While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.

Continued on the next page

23

ENGLISH

???This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the conditions below:

???Bit rate: 8 kbps ??? 320 kbps

???Sampling frequency:

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1) 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)

???Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name

???The maximum number of characters for file/ folder names vary among the disc format used (includes 4 extension characters???<.mp3> or <.wma>).

???ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

???ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

???Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters

???Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters

???Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72) characters

*The parenthetic figure is the maximum number of characters for file/folder names in case the total number of files and folders is 313 or more.

???This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time. Especially, after performing the search function, this difference becomes noticeable.

???This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.

???This unit cannot play back the following files:

??? MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.

??? MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.

??? MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

??? WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and voice format.

??? WMA files which are not based upon Windows Media?? Audio.

??? WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

??? Files which have the data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.

???The search function works but search speed is not constant.

Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB memory

???While playing from a USB memory, the playback order may differ from other players.

???This unit may be unable to play back some USB memories due to their characteristics or recording conditions.

???Depending on the shape of the USB memories and connection ports, some USB memories may not be attached properly or the connection might be loose.

???It is not recommended to use a USB memory wider than 20 mm as it will block you from pressing the 0 button.

???If the connected USB memory does not have the correct files, ???NO FILES??? appears and the unit returns to the previous source.

???This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.

???This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the conditions below:

???Bit rate:

MP3: 32 kbps ??? 320 kbps (MPEG-1)

8 kbps ??? 160 kbps (MPEG-2/2.5) WMA:5 kbps ??? 320 kbps

???Sampling frequency:

MP3: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (MPEG-1) 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (MPEG-2) 12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (MPEG-2.5)

WMA:8 kHz ??? 48 kHz

???This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in VBR (variable bit rate).

???The maximum number of characters for folder and file names is 25 characters; 128 characters for MP3/WMA tag information.

???This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files and 250 folders (999 files per folder).

???This unit cannot play back the following files:

???MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.

???MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.

???MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

Changing the source

???If you change the source, playback also stops. Next time you select the same source again, playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.

Ejecting a disc

???If the ejected disc is not removed within

15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted again into the loading slot to protect it from dust. (Disc will not play this time.)

24

General settings???PSM

??????AUTO??? setting for ???DIMMER??? may not work correctly on some vehicles, particularly on those having a control dial for dimming. In this case, change the ???DIMMER??? setting to any other than ???AUTO.???

???If you change the ???AMP GAIN??? setting from ???HIGH PWR??? to ???LOW PWR??? while the volume level is set higher than ???VOL 30,??? the unit automatically changes the volume level to ???VOL 30.???

Title assignment

???If you try to assign titles to more than 30 discs, ???NAMEFULL??? appears. Delete unwanted titles before assignment.

???Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can also be shown if you play back the disc from the unit and vice versa.

DAB tuner operations

Maintenance

How to clean the connectors

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.

iPod?? or D. player operations

???When you turn on this unit, the iPod or D. player is charged through this unit.

???While the iPod or D. player is connected, all operations from the iPod or D. player are disabled. Perform all operations from this unit.

???The text information may not be displayed correctly.

??? Some characters such as accented letters cannot be shown correctly on the display.

??? Depends on the condition of communication between the iPod or D. player and the unit.

???If the text information includes more than 8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see also page 17). This unit can display up to 40 characters.

Notice:

When operating an iPod or a D. player, some operations may not be performed correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the following JVC web site:

For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/ english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>

For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/ english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>

Connector

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the CD player in the following cases:

???After starting the heater in the car.

???If it becomes very humid inside the car. Should this occur, the CD player may malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until the moisture evaporates.

How to handle discs

???Always hold the disc by the

edges. Do not touch its recording surface.

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the disc around the center holder (with the printed surface facing up).

???Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.

Continued on the next page

25

ENGLISH

To keep discs clean

A dirty disc may not play correctly. If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to edge.

???Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean discs.

To play new discs

New discs may have some rough spots around the inner and outer edges. If such a disc is used, this unit may reject the disc.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Do not use the following discs:

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.

FM/AM General

Disc playback

MP3/WMA playback

???Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. ??? Stop playback while driving on rough roads.

???Change the disc.

???Check the cords and connections.

??? Disc cannot be played back. ??? Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.

???Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file names.

26

MP3/WMA playback

playback

ENGLISH

USB memory

??????READ??? and ???FAILED??? appear alternately on the display, then returns to the previous source.

???The attached USB memory may be malfunctioning, or may not have been formatted correctly. The files included in the USB memory are corrupted.

???Do not pull out or attach the USB memory repeatedly while ???CHECK??? appears on the display.

Continued on the next page

27

28

Specifications

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION

Maximum Power Output: Front: 50 W per channel Rear: 50 W per channel

Continuous Power Output (RMS):

Front: 19 W per channel into 4 ???, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion.

Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 ???, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion.

Load Impedance: 4 ??? (4 ??? to 8 ??? allowance) Tone Control Range:

Bass: ??10 dB at 100 Hz

Treble: ??10 dB at 10 kHz Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB

Line-Out Level/Impedance:

2.5 V/20 k??? load (full scale) Output Impedance: 1 k??? Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:

2.0 V/20 k??? load (full scale) Other Terminals:

CD changer, Steering wheel remote input

TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range:

FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

AM: (MW) 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz (LW) 144 kHz to 279 kHz

[FM Tuner]

Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 ??V/75 ???) 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

16.3 dBf (1.8 ??V/75 ???)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

Stereo Separation: 30 dB

[MW Tuner]

Sensitivity: 20 ??V

Selectivity: 35 dB

[LW Tuner]

Sensitivity: 50 ??V

CD PLAYER/USB MEMORY SECTION

Type: Compact disc player

Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)

Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit MP3 Decoding Format:

MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3 Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps

WMA (Windows Media?? Audio) Decoding Format:

Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps Playable USB memory:

Format: FAT 12/16/32

Storage: Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)

Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA

Max. Current: Less than 500 mA

GENERAL

Power Requirement: Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance) Grounding System: Negative ground Allowable Operating Temperature:

0??C to +40??C Dimensions (W ?? H ?? D):

Installation Size (approx.):

182 mm ?? 52 mm ?? 152 mm Panel Size (approx.):

188 mm ?? 58 mm ?? 11 mm Mass (approx.):

1.4 kg (excluding accessories)

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

???Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

???iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

ENGLISH

29

Having TROUBLE with operation?

Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

Vous avez des PROBL??MES de fonctionnement?

R??initialisez votre appareil

R??f??rez-vous ?? la page intitul??e Comment r??initialiser votre appareil

KD-G722/KD-G721

Installation/Connection Manual

Manuel d???installation/raccordement

GET0357-010A

[EX/EU]

ENGLISH

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealers.

1205DTSMDTJEIN EN, FR

?? 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

FRAN??AIS

Cet appareil est con??u pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant continu de 12 V ?? masse NEGATIVE. Si votre v??hicule n???offre pas ce type d???alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous pouvez acheter chez un revendeur d???autoradios JVC.

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery???s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before installing the unit.

??? Be sure to ground this unit to the car???s chassis again after installation.

Notes:

???Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.

???It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 ??? to 8 ???). If the maximum power is less than

50 W, change ???AMP GAIN??? setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 18 of the

INSTRUCTIONS).

???To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.

???The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.

Heat sink

Dissipateur de chaleur

Pour ??viter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de d??brancher la borne n??gative de la batterie et d???effectuer tous les raccordements ??lectriques avant d???installer l???appareil.

???Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise ?? la masse de cet appareil au ch??ssis de la voiture apr??s l???installation.

Remarques:

???Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur pr??cis??e. Si le fusible saute souvent, consulter votre revendeur d???autoradios JVC.

???Il est recommand?? de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance de plus de 50 W (les enceintes arri??re et les enceintes avant, avec une imp??dance comprise entre 4 ??? et 8 ???). Si la puissance maximum est inf??rieure ?? 50 W, changez ???AMP GAIN??? pour ??viter d???endommager vos enceintes (voir page 18 du

MANUEL D???INSTRUCTIONS).

???Pour ??viter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont PAS UTILIS??S avec de la bande isolante.

???Le dissipateur de chaleur devient tr??s chaud apr??s usage. Faire attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant cet appareil.

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:

???DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.

???BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.

PRECAUTIONS sur l???alimentation et la connexion des enceintes:

???NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d???enceintes du cordon d???alimentation ?? la batterie; sinon, l???appareil serait s??rieusement endommag??.

???AVANT de connecter les fils d???enceintes du cordon d???alimentation aux enceintes, v??rifiez le c??blage des enceintes de votre voiture.

1

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying kits.

??? If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.

*1 When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.

*1 Lorsque vous mettez l???appareil ?? la verticale, faire attention de ne pas endommager le fusible situ?? sur l???arri??re.

L???illustration suivante est un exemple d???installation typique. Si vous avez des questions ou avez besoin d???information sur des kits d???installation, consulter votre revendeur d???autoradios JVC ou une compagnie d???approvisionnement.

???Si l???on n???est pas s??r de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le faire installer par un technicien qualifi??.

Do the required electrical connections.

R??alisez les connexions ??lectriques.

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the sleeve firmly in place.

Tordez les languettes appropri??es pour maintenir le manchon en place.

Removing the unit

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.

Retrait de l???appareil

Avant de retirer l???appareil, lib??rer la section arri??re.

Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated so that the unit can be removed.

Ins??rez les deux poign??es, puis tirez de la fa??on illustr??e de fa??on ?? retirer l???appareil.

When using the optional stay / Lors de l???utilisation du hauban en option

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Lors de l???installation de l???appareil scans utiliser de manchon

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.

Dans une voiture Toyota, par exemple, retirez d???abord l???autoradio et installez l???appareil ?? sa place.

Dashboard

Tableau de bord

Screw (option)

Vis (en option)

Flat type screws (M5 ??? 8 mm)*2

Vis ?? t??te plate (M5 ??? 8 mm)*2

Bracket*2

Support*2

Pocket

*2 Not supplied for this unit.

*2 Non fourni avec cet autoradio.

Flat type screws (M5 ??? 8 mm)*2

Vis ?? t??te plate (M5 ??? 8 mm)*2

Poche

Bracket*2

Support*2

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30??.

Installez l???appareil avec un angle de moins de 30??.

??? The fuse blows.

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

???Power cannot be turned on.

* Is the yellow lead connected?

???No sound from the speakers.

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

??? Sound is distorted.

*Is the speaker output lead grounded?

*Are the ????????? terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

??? Noise interfere with sounds.

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car???s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?

??? This unit becomes hot.

*Is the speaker output lead grounded?

*Are the ????????? terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

??? This unit does not work at all.

* Have you reset your unit?

??? Le fusible saute.

* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racord??s correctement?

???L???appareil ne peut pas ??tre mise sous tension.

* Le fil jaune est-elle raccord??e?

???Pas de son des enceintes.

* Le fil de sortie d???enceinte est-il court-circuit???

??? Le son est d??form??.

*Le fil de sortie d???enceinte est-il ?? la masse?

*Les bornes ????????? des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble ?? la masse?

??? Interf??rence avec les sons.

* La prise arri??re de mise ?? la terre est-elle connect??e au ch??ssis de la voiture avec un cordon court et ??pais?

??? L???appareil devient chaud.

*Le fil de sortie d???enceinte est-il ?? la masse?

*Les bornes ????????? des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble ?? la masse?

??? Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.

* Avez-vous r??initialis?? votre appareil?

2

AIf your car is equipped with the ISO connector / Si votre voiture est ??quipp??e d???un connecteur ISO

???Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.

???Connectez les connecteurs ISO comme montr?? sur l???illustration.

For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile / Pour certaine voiture VW/Audi ou Opel (Vauxhall)

You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.

??? Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.

Vous aurrez peut-??tre besoin de modifier le c??blage du cordon d???alimentation fourni comme montr?? sur l???illustration.

??? Contactez votre revendeur automobile autoris?? avant d???installer l???appareil.

From the car body

De la carrosserie de la voiture

ISO connector of the supplied power cord

Connecteur ISO pour le cordon d???alimentation fourni

View from the lead side

Vue ?? partir du c??t?? des fils

Original wiring / C??blage original

ISO connector

Connecteur ISO

Modified wiring 1 / C??blage modifi?? 1

Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.

Utilisez le c??blage modifi?? 2 si l???appareil ne se met pas sous tension.

Modified wiring 2 / C??blage modifi?? 2

B Connections without using the ISO connectors / Connexions sans l???utilisation des connecteurs ISO

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.

1 Cut the ISO connector.

2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.

3 Connect the aerial cord.

4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

Avant de commencer la connexion: V??rifiez attentivement le c??blage du v??hicule. Une connexion incorrecte peut endommager s??rieusement l???appareil.

Le fil du cordon d???alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du ch??ssis de la voiture peuvent ??tre diff??rents en couleur.

1 Coupez le connecteur ISO.

2 Connectez les fils color??s du cordon d???alimentation dans l???ordre sp??cifi?? sur l???illustration ci-dessous.

3 Connectez le cordon d???antenne.

4 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils ?? l???appareil.

To subwoofer (see diagram )

Aerial connector Au caisson de grave (voir le diagramme ) Connecteur d???antenne

Rear ground terminal

Borne arri??re de masse

Line out (see diagram )

Sortie de ligne

(voir le diagramme )

15 A fuse

Fusible 15 A

*1 Not supplied for this unit.

*1 Non fourni avec cet autoradio.

Black

Noir

To metallic body or chassis of the car

Vers corps m??tallique ou ch??ssis de la voiture

Yellow *2

Ignition switch

Interrupteur d???allumage

To external components (see diagram )

Au appareils ext??rieurs (voir le diagramme )

*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.

Jaune *2

Red

Rouge

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

?? une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connect??e ?? la batterie de la voiture (en d??rivant l???interrupteur d???allumage) (12 V constant)

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible

Fuse block

Porte-fusible

*2 Pour v??rifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant installation, ce fil doit ??tre raccord??, sinon l???appareil ne peut pas ??tre mis sous tension.

Blue with white stripe

Bleu avec bande blanche

Orange with white stripe

Orange avec bande blanche

Brown

Marron

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)

Au fil de t??l??commande de l???autre appareil ou ?? l???antenne automatique s???il y en a une (200 mA max.)

To car light control switch

?? l???interrupteur d?????clairage de la voiture

To cellular phone system

?? un syst??me de t??l??phone cellulaire

3

C Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / Connexion d???amplificateurs ext??rieurs et/ou d???un caisson de grave

You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.

???Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through this unit.

???Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.

Vous pouvez connecter des amplificateurs pour am??liorer votre syst??me st??r??o.

???Connectez le fil de commande ?? distance (bleu avec bande blanche) au fil de commande ?? distance de l???autre appareil de fa??on qu???il puisse ??tre command?? via cet appareil.

???D??connectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-les ?? l???amplificateur. Laissez les fils d???enceintes de cet appareil inutilis??s.

Rear speakers

Enceintes arri??re

JVC Amplifier

JVC Amplificateur

Front speakers

Enceintes avant

JVC Amplifier

JVC Amplificateur

JVC Amplifier

JVC Amplificateur

Subwoofer

Caisson de grave

Rear speakers

Enceintes arri??re

Front speakers (see diagram )

Enceintes avant (voir le diagramme )

*5 Cut the rear speaker leads of the car???s ISO connector and connect them to the amplifier.

*5 Coupez les fils des enceintes arri??re du connecteur ISO de la voiture et connectez-les ?? l???amplificateur.

*3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car???to the place not coated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.

*3 Attachez solidement le fil de mise ?? la masse au ch??ssis m??tallique de la voiture????? un endroit qui n???est pas recouvert de peinture (s???il est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d???abord la peinture avant d???attacher le fil). L???appareil peut ??tre endommag?? si cela n???est pas fait correctement.

*4 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

*4 Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet autoradio)

D Connecting the external components / Connexion des appareils ext??rieurs

CD changer, DAB tuner, Apple iPod??, or JVC D. player / Changeur de CD, tuner DAB, iPod??? Apple?? ou lecteur D. JVC

??? Set ???CHANGER??? for the external input setting (See page 17 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Choisissez ???CHANGER??? pour le r??glage de l???entr??e ext??rieure (Voir page 17 du MANUEL D???INSTRUCTIONS.)

You can connect these components in series as illustrated below. The iPod*6 or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)???KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).

Vous pouvez connecter ces appareils en s??rie comme montr??e sur l???illustration. Le iPod*6 ou le lecteur D. peut ??tre connect?? en utilisant un adaptateur d???interface (non fourni)???KS-PD100 (pour iPod) ou KS-PD500 (pour le lecteur D.).

Connection 1 (integrated connection) / Connexion 1 (connexion int??gr??e)

or ou

CD changer jack

Prise du changeur de CD

Apple iPod (separately purchased) iPod Apple (vendu s??par??ment)

JVC D. player (separately purchased)

Lecteur D. JVC (vendu s??par??ment)

CAUTION / PRECAUTION:

???Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.

???Avant de connecter les appareils ext??rieurs, assurez-vous que l???appareil est hors tension.

Connection 2 (alternative connection) / Connexion 2 (connexion alternative)

Apple iPod (separately purchased) iPod Apple (vendu s??par??ment)

or

ouJVC D. player (separately purchased)

Lecteur D. JVC (vendu s??par??ment)

CD changer jack

Prise du changeur de CD

*6 iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

*6 iPod est une marque de commerce d???Apple Computer, Inc., enregistr??e aux ??tats-Unis et dans les autres pays.

*7 Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer or DAB tuner

*7 Cordon de connexion fourni avec votre changeur CD ou tuner DAB

Other external component / Autre appareil ext??rieur

??? Set ???EXT IN??? for the external input setting (See page 17 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Choisissez ???EXT IN??? pour le r??glage de l???entr??e ext??rieure (Voir page 17 du MANUEL D???INSTRUCTIONS.)

External component

Appareil ext??rieur

*8 Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)

*8 Adaptateur d???entr??e de ligne KS-U57 (non fourni avec cet autoradio)

*9 AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)

*9 Adaptateur d???entr??e AUX KS-U58 (non fourni avec cet autoradio)

E Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Connexion de la t??l??commande de volant

If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller, you can operate this unit using the controller. To do it, a JVC???s OE remote adapter (not supplied) which matches with your car is required. Consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer for details.

Si votre voiture est munie d???une t??l??commande de volant, vous pouvez commander cet autoradio en utilisant la t??l??commande. Pour le faire, un adaptateur pour t??l??commande au volant JVC (non fourni) correspondant ?? votre voiture est n??cessaire. Consultez votre revendeur d???autoradio JVC pour les d??tails.

Steering wheel remote input

Entr??e de la t??l??commande de volant

OE remote adapter (not supplied)

Adaptateur pour t??l??commande au volant (non fourni)

Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)

T??l??commande de volant (install??e dans la voiture)

4

CD RECEIVER

CD-RECEIVER

?????????????? ?? ???????????????????????????? ??????????????-????????????

KD-G722/KD-G721

????CCK???? DEUTSCH ENGLISH

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 7. Zum Abbrechen der Displaydemonstration siehe Seite 7.

???????????????????? ???? ???????????? ???????????????????????? ?????????????? ?????????????? ????. ???? ??????. 7.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

F??r den Einbau und die Anschl??sse siehe das eigenst??ndige Handbuch.

???????????????? ???? ?????????????????? ?? ???????????????????? ???????????????????? ???????????????????? ?? ?????????????????? ????????????????????.

INSTRUCTIONS

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG

???????????????????? ???? ????????????????????????

GET0357-006A

[EY]

ENGLISH

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1.CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2.CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.

3.CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.

4.REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

How to reset your unit

??? Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc

???PLEASE??? and ???EJECT??? appear alternately on the display.

???If this does not work, reset your unit.

???Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.

How to use the MODE button

If you press MODE, the unit goes into functions mode, then the number buttons and 5/??? buttons work as different function buttons.

Ex.: When number button 2 works as MO (monaural) button.

Time countdown indicator

To use these buttons for their original

functions again after pressing MODE, wait for 5 seconds without pressing any of these buttons until the functions mode is cleared or press MODE again.

For security reasons, a numbered ID card is provided with this unit, and the same ID number is imprinted on the unit???s chassis.

Keep the card in a safe place, as it will help the authorities to identify your unit if stolen.

2

How to read this manual

???Button operations are mainly explained with the illustrations in the table below.

???Some related tips and notes are explained in ???More about this unit??? (see pages 22 ??? 25).

Press briefly.

Press repeatedly.

Press either one.

Press and hold until your desired response begins.

Press and hold both buttons at the same time.

The following marks are used to indicate...

: Built-in CD player operations.

: External CD changer operations. : External USB memory operations.

: Indicator displayed for the corresponding operation.

Warning:

If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved in a traffic accident.

Caution on volume setting:

Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.

CONTENTS

For safety...

???Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.

???Stop the car before performing any complicated operations.

Temperature inside the car...

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes normal before operating the unit.

3

ENGLISH

Control panel ??? KD-G722 and KD-G721

Parts identification

How to detach/attach the control panel

Detaching...Attaching...

Lever

CAUTION:

The lever comes out if you pressed the 0button while the panel is detached. If this happens, push the lever back into lock position before attaching the panel.

4

Display window

ENGLISH

a Track information indicators???TAG (ID3 Tag), (track/file), (folder)

s Tuner reception indicators???ST (stereo), MO (monaural)

d RDS indicators???TP, PTY, AF, REG f Main display

g Tr (track) indicator

h LOUD (loudness) indicator

j Source display / Volume level indicator

kPlayback mode / item indicators??? RND (random), (disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)

l Tracks type indicators*???WMA, MP3 / Playback source indicators*???CH (CD changer), DISC (built-in CD player)

z EQ (equalizer) indicator

xSound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer) indicators???USER, ROCK, CLASSIC,

POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ

???also works as the time countdown indicator and level meter during play (see page 17).

* lights up for the selected item.

Remote controller ??? RM-RK50

Aim the remote controller directly at the remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle in between.

The unit is equipped with the steering wheel remote control function.

???See the Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume) for connection.

Continued on the next page

5

Main elements and features

1 (standby/on/attenuator) button

???Turns the power on if pressed briefly or attenuates the sound when the power is on.

???Turns the power off if pressed and held. 2 5U (up) / D (down) ???buttons

???Changes the FM/AM/DAB bands with 5U.

???Changes the preset stations (or services) with D ???.

???Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA/ USB.

???While playing an MP3 disc on an MP3-compatible CD changer:

???Changes the disc if pressed briefly.

???Changes the folder if pressed and held.

???While listening to an Apple iPod?? or a JVC D. player:

???Pauses/stops or resumes playback with D ???.

???Enter the main menu with 5U. (Now 5U/D ???/2R/F 3work as the

menu selecting buttons.)*

3VOL ??? / VOL + buttons

???Adjusts the volume level. 4 SOUND button

???Selects the sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer).

5 SOURCE button

??? Selects the source.

62R (reverse) / F (forward) 3buttons

???Searches for stations (or services) if pressed briefly.

???Searches for ensembles if pressed and held.

???Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and held.

???Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.

???While listening to an iPod or a D. player (in menu selecting mode):

???Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press D ???to confirm the selection.)

???Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.

*5U : Returns to the previous menu.

D ??? : Confirms the selection.

6

Getting started

Basic operations

~ Turn on the power.

??

*You cannot select these sources if they are not ready or not connected.

!

For FM/AM tuner

For DAB tuner

??? Adjust the volume.

Volume level appears.

Volume level indicator

@Adjust the sound as you want. (See page 15.)

Basic settings

???See also ???General settings ??? PSM??? on pages 16 ??? 18.

1

2

1 Canceling the display demonstrations

Select ???DEMO,??? then ???DEMO OFF.???

2Setting the clock

Select ???CLOCK H??? (hour), then adjust the hour.

Select ???CLOCK M??? (minute), then adjust the minute.

Select ???24H/12H,??? then ???24H??? (hour) or ???12H??? (hour).

3 Finish the procedure.

To check the current clock time while the power is turned off

7

ENGLISH

Radio operations

~

??

Lights up when receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength.

Selected band appears.

!Start searching for a station.

When a station is received, searching stops.

To stop searching, press the same button again.

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive

Lights up when monaural mode is activated.

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure. ???MONO OFF??? appears and the MO indicator goes off.

Storing stations in memory

You can preset six stations for each band.

FM station automatic presetting??? SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)

1Select the FM band (FM1 ??? FM3) you want to store into.

To tune in to a station manually

In step ! above...

1

2 Select a desired station frequency.

2

3

???SSM??? appears, then disappears when automatic presetting is over.

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are searched and stored automatically in the FM band.

8

Manual presetting

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number 4 of the FM1 band.

2

Listening to a preset station

1

2Select the preset station (1 ??? 6) you want.

To check the current clock time while listening to an FM (non-RDS) or AM station

??? For FM RDS stations, see page 11.

Frequency ??Clock

FM RDS operations

???Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the following)

???TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY Standby Receptions (see pages 10 and 16)

???Tracing the same programme automatically ???Network-Tracking Reception (see page 11)

???Programme Search (see page 17)

Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme

You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favorite programme by searching for a PTY code.

???To store your favorite programme types, see page 10.

??Select one of your favorite programme types.

or

Select one of the PTY codes (see page 10).

Continued on the next page

9

If there is a station broadcasting a programme of the same PTY code as you have selected, that station is tuned in.

PTY codes

NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE, SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS, OTHER M (music),

WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music), OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT

Storing your favorite programme types

You can store six favorite programme types.

Preset programme types in the number buttons (1 to 6):

1 Select a PTY code (see page 9).

2Select the preset number (1 ??? 6) you want to store into.

4 Finish the procedure.

Using the standby receptions

TA Standby Reception

TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any source other than AM.

The volume changes to the preset TA volume level if the current level is lower than the preset level (see page 17).

To activate TA Standby Reception

The TP (Traffic Programme) indicator either lights up or flashes.

???If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby Reception is activated.

???If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby Reception is not yet activated. (This occurs when you are listening to an FM station without the RDS signals required for TA Standby Reception.)

To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in to another station providing these signals. The TP indicator will stop flashing and remain lit.

To deactivate the TA Standby Reception

The TP indicator goes off.

Ex.: When ???ROCK M??? is selected

3Repeat steps 1 and 2 to store other PTY codes into other preset numbers.

PTY Standby Reception

PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch temporarily to your favorite PTY programme from any source other than AM.

To activate and select your favorite PTY code

for PTY Standby Reception, see page 16. The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.

???If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby Reception is activated.

10

???If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is not yet activated.

To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in to another station providing these signals. The PTY indicator will stop flashing and remain lit.

To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception,

select ???OFF??? for the PTY code (see page 16). The PTY indicator goes off.

Tracing the same programme??? Network-Tracking Reception

When driving in an area where FM reception is not sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to another FM RDS station of the same network, possibly broadcasting the same programme with stronger signals (see the illustration below).

When shipped from the factory, Network- Tracking Reception is activated.

To change the Network-Tracking Reception

setting, see ???AF-REG??? on page 16.

Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas (01 ??? 05)

Disc/USB memory

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.

To stop play and eject the disc

Playing discs in the CD changer

All discs in the magazine will be played repeatedly until you change the source.

??? Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.

~

??

To check the current clock time while listening to an FM RDS station

*If you have changed the external input setting to ???EXT IN??? (see page 17), you cannot select the CD changer.

Select a disc.

For disc number from 01 ??? 06:

For disc number from 07 ??? 12:

Station name (PS) =Station Frequency =

Programme type (PTY) =Clock =(back to the

beginning)

Continued on the next page

11

USB memory

If a USB memory has been attached...

Playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.

???If a different USB memory is currently attached, playback starts from the beginning.

To eject the USB memory, straightly pull it out from the unit.

Cautions:

???Avoid using the USB memory if it might hinder your safety driving.

???Make sure all important data has been backed up to avoid losing the data.

About MP3 and WMA tracks

MP3 and WMA ???tracks??? (words ???file??? and ???track??? are used interchangeably) are recorded in ???folders.???

About the CD changer

It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.

???You can also connect MP3-incompatible CD changers. However, these units are not compatible with MP3 discs.

???You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.

???You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD changer.

???Disc text information recorded in the CD Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text compatible CD changer is connected.

???For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume).

To fast-forward or reverse the track

To go to the next or previous tracks

To go to the next or previous folders (only for MP3/WMA/USB)

For MP3 tracks: For WMA tracks:

12

To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder (for MP3/ WMA/USB) directly

To select a number from 01 ??? 06:

2

Each time you press the button, you can skip 10 tracks.

???After the last track, the first track will be selected and vice versa.

ENGLISH

To select a number from 07 ??? 12:

???To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA/ USB, it is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their folder names???01, 02, 03, and so on.

To select a particular track in a folder (for MP3/WMA/USB):

Other main functions

Skipping tracks quickly during play

Only possible on JVC

MP3-compatible CD changer

???For MP3/WMA/USB, you can skip tracks within the same folder.

Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track whose number is a single digit (1 to 9)

1

3

Prohibiting disc ejection

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure.

13

ENGLISH

Changing the display information

While playing an audio CD or a CD Text

While playing an MP3/WMA*2 disc or a

USB memory

???When ???TAG DISP??? is set to ???TAG ON??? (see page 18)

??? When ???TAG DISP??? is set to ???TAG OFF???

: Elapsed playing time with the current track number

: Clock with the current track number

*1 If the current disc is an audio CD, ???NO NAME??? appears.

*2 Only for the built-in CD player and external USB memory.

*3 If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information, folder name and file name appear. In this case, the TAG indicator will not light up.

Selecting the playback modes

You can use only one of the following playback modes at a time.

1

2Select your desired playback mode.

7 Repeat play

7 Random play

*4 Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/ USB).

*5 Only while playing discs in the CD changer.

14

Sound adjustments

You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre (C-EQ: custom equalizer).

1

2

Adjusting the sound

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your preference.

1

2

Indication pattern changes as you adjust the level.

Indication, [Range]

BAS*1 (bass), [???06 to +06]

Adjust the bass.

TRE*1 (treble), [???06 to +06]

Adjust the treble.

FAD*2 (fader), [R06 to F06]

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.

BAL (balance), [L06 to R06]

Adjust the left and right speaker balance.

LOUD*1 (loudness), [LOUD ON or

LOUD OFF]

Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced sound at low volume level.

SUB.W*3 (subwoofer), [00 to 08]

Adjust the subwoofer output level.

VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50*4]

Adjust the volume.

*1 When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness, the adjustment you have made is stored for the currently selected sound mode (C-EQ) including ???USER.???

*2 If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to ???00.???

*3 This takes effect only when a subwoofer is connected.

*4 Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See page 18 for details.)

ENGLISH

Ex.: When ???TRE??? is selected

15

General settings ??? PSM

ENGLISH

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items listed in the table that follows.

1

2 Select a PSM item.

3 Adjust the PSM item selected.

4Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other PSM items if necessary.

5 Finish the procedure.

16

*1 Depends on the amplifier gain control (see page 18). *2 Displayed only when DAB tuner is connected.

*3 Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display. *4 Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected???FM, AM, CD, or USB.

Continued on the next page

ENGLISH

17

ENGLISH

Title assignment

You can assign titles to CDs (both in the unit and the CD changer). You can assign up to 30 discs and each title up to 32 characters.

???You cannot assign a title to a CD Text, an MP3/WMA disc, or a USB memory.

1Select the sources.

???For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.

???For CDs in the CD changer: Select ???CD-CH,??? then select a disc number.

2 Enter the title assignment mode.

Ex.: When ???CD??? is selected as the source

3Assign a title.

1 Select a character.

2Move to the next (or previous) character position.

3Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish entering the title.

4 Finish the procedure.

To erase the entire title

In step 2 on the left...

Available characters

18

iPod??/D. player operations

This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod or a JVC D. player from the control panel.

Before operating your iPod or D. player: Connect either one of the following (separately purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear of this unit.

???Interface adapter for iPod?????KS-PD100 for controlling an iPod.

???D. player interface adapter???KS-PD500 for controlling a D. player.

???For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume).

???For details, refer also to the manual supplied with the interface adapter.

Caution:

Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the vehicle???s ignition switch before connecting or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.

Preparations:

Make sure ???CHANGER??? is selected for the external input setting, see page 17.

~

??

Playback starts automatically from where it has been paused*1 or stopped*2 previously.

! Adjust the volume.

To pause*1 or stop*2 playback

To resume playback, press it again.

To fast-forward or reverse the track

To go to the next or previous tracks

*1 For iPod

*2 For D. player

Selecting a track from the menu

1 Enter the main menu.

Now the 5/???/ 4/??buttons work as the menu selecting buttons*3.

*3 The menu selecting mode will be canceled:

???If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.

???When you confirm the selection of a track.

Continued on the next page

19

ENGLISH

2 Select the desired menu.

For iPod:

PLAYLIST ??ARTISTS ??ALBUMS ??SONGS ??GENRES ??COMPOSER ??(back to the

beginning)

For D. player:

PLAYLIST ??ARTIST ??ALBUM ??GENRE

??TRACK ??(back to the beginning)

3 Confirm the selection.

To move back to the previous menu, press 5.

???If a track is selected, playback starts automatically.

???If the selected item has another layer, you will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the desired track is played.

???Holding 4/?? can skip 10 items at a time.

7 Random play

ALBM RND*

Functions the same as ???Shuffle Albums??? of the iPod.

SONG RND/RND ON

Functions the same as ???Shuffle Songs??? of the iPod or ???Random Play =On??? of the D. player.

RND OFF

Cancels.

*For iPod: Only if you select ???ALL??? in ???ALBUMS??? of the main ???MENU.???

To check other information while listening to an iPod or a D. player

Selecting the playback modes

1

2 Select your desired playback mode.

7 Repeat play

ONE RPT

Functions the same as ???Repeat One??? of the iPod or ???Repeat Mode =One??? for the D. player.

ALL RPT

Functions the same as ???Repeat All??? of the iPod or ???Repeat Mode =All??? for the D. player.

RPT OFF

Cancels.

Other external component operations

You can connect an external component to the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input Adapter???KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX Input Adapter???KS-U58 (not supplied).

???For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume).

For listening to the USB memory, see pages

12 ??? 14; For iPod or D. player, see pages 19 ??? 20.

~

If ???EXT IN??? does not appear, see page 17 and select the external input (???EXT IN???).

20

??Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

! Adjust the volume.

???Adjust the sound as you want. (See page 15.)

To check the current clock time while listening to an external component

EXT IN ??Clock

DAB tuner operations

What is DAB system?

Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB) can deliver digital quality sound without any annoying interference and signal distortion. Furthermore, it can carry text, pictures, and data. When transmitting, DAB combines several programmes (called ???services???) to form one ???ensemble.??? In addition, each ???service?????? called ???primary service??????can also be divided into its components (called ???secondary service???). A typical ensemble has six or more programmes (services) broadcast at the same time.

By connecting the DAB tuner, this unit can do the following:

???Tracing the same programme automatically ???Alternative Frequency Reception (see ???DAB AF??? on page 17).

It is recommended to use DAB tuner KT-DB1000 with your unit. If you have another DAB tuner, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.

???Refer also to the Instructions supplied for your DAB tuner.

~

When an ensemble is received, searching stops.

To stop searching, press the same button again.

???Select a service (either primary or secondary) to listen to.

To tune in to an ensemble manually

Start searching for an ensemble, as in step !

above...

1

2 Select a desired ensemble frequency.

Storing DAB services in memory

You can preset six DAB services (primary) for each band.

1 Select a service you want (see above).

Continued on the next page

21

2Select the preset number (1 ??? 6) you want to store into.

ENGLISH

Preset number flashes for a while.

Tuning in to a preset DAB service

2Select the preset DAB service (primary) number (1 ??? 6) you want.

If the selected primary service has some secondary services, pressing the same button again will tune in to the secondary services.

When shipped from the factory, Alternative Frequency Reception is activated.

To deactivate the Alternative Frequency Reception, see page 17.

To change the display information while tuning to an ensemble

Service name =Ensemble name =Channel number =Frequency =Clock =(back to the beginning)

More about this unit

Basic operations

Turning on the power

???By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.

Turning off the power

???If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc play will start from where playback has been stopped previously, next time you turn on the power.

Tracing the same programme??? Alternative Frequency Reception

You can keep listening to the same programme by activating the Alternative Frequency Reception.

???While receiving a DAB service:

When driving in an area where a service cannot be received, this unit automatically tunes in to another ensemble or FM RDS station, broadcasting the same programme.

???While receiving an FM RDS station:

When driving in an area where a DAB service is broadcasting the same programme as the FM RDS station is broadcasting, this unit automatically tunes in to the DAB service.

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

???During SSM search...

???All previously stored stations are erased and stations are stored newly.

???Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).

???When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.

???When storing a station manually, the previously preset station is erased when a new station is stored in the same preset number.

22

FM RDS operations

???Network-Tracking Reception requires two types of RDS signals???PI (Programme Identification) and AF (Alternative Frequency) to work correctly. Without receiving these data correctly, Network-

Tracking Reception will not operate correctly.

???If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby Reception, the volume level automatically changes to the preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower than the preset level.

???When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated (with AF selected), Network- Tracking Reception is also activated

automatically. On the other hand, Network- Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated without deactivating Alternative Frequency Reception. (See page 16.)

???If you want to know more about RDS, visit ??http://www.rds.org.uk??.

Disc operations

Caution for DualDisc playback

???The Non-DVD side of a ???DualDisc??? does not comply with the ???Compact Disc Digital Audio??? standard. Therefore, the use of Non- DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may not be recommended.

General

???This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/ CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3, and WMA formats.

Inserting a disc

???When a disc is inserted upside down, ???PLEASE??? and ???EJECT??? appear alternately on the display. Press 0to eject the disc.

???Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into the loading slot.

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

???Use only ???finalized??? CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

???This unit can play back only files of the same type which are first detected if a disc includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/ WMA files.

???This unit can play back multi-session discs; however, unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.

???Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the following reasons:

???Discs are dirty or scratched.

???Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside the unit.

???The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

???CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with ???Packet Write??? method.

???There are improper recording conditions (missing data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched, warped, etc.).

???CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.

???Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

???Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck to the surface.

???Discs on which labels can be directly

printed by an ink jet printer.

Using these discs under high temperatures or high humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the unit.

Playing an MP3/WMA disc

???This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the letter case???upper/lower).

???This unit can show the names of albums, artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.

???This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other characters can be correctly displayed.

ENGLISH

Playing a disc

??? While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.

Continued on the next page

23

ENGLISH

???This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the conditions below:

???Bit rate: 8 kbps ??? 320 kbps

???Sampling frequency:

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1) 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)

???Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name

???The maximum number of characters for file/ folder names vary among the disc format used (includes 4 extension characters???<.mp3> or <.wma>).

???ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

???ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

???Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters

???Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters

???Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72) characters

*The parenthetic figure is the maximum number of characters for file/folder names in case the total number of files and folders is 313 or more.

???This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time. Especially, after performing the search function, this difference becomes noticeable.

???This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.

???This unit cannot play back the following files:

??? MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.

??? MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.

??? MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

??? WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and voice format.

??? WMA files which are not based upon Windows Media?? Audio.

??? WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

??? Files which have the data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.

???The search function works but search speed is not constant.

Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB memory

???While playing from a USB memory, the playback order may differ from other players.

???This unit may be unable to play back some USB memories due to their characteristics or recording conditions.

???Depending on the shape of the USB memories and connection ports, some USB memories may not be attached properly or the connection might be loose.

???It is not recommended to use a USB memory wider than 20 mm as it will block you from pressing the 0 button.

???If the connected USB memory does not have the correct files, ???NO FILES??? appears and the unit returns to the previous source.

???This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.

???This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the conditions below:

???Bit rate:

MP3: 32 kbps ??? 320 kbps (MPEG-1)

8 kbps ??? 160 kbps (MPEG-2/2.5) WMA:5 kbps ??? 320 kbps

???Sampling frequency:

MP3: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (MPEG-1) 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (MPEG-2) 12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (MPEG-2.5)

WMA:8 kHz ??? 48 kHz

???This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in VBR (variable bit rate).

???The maximum number of characters for folder and file names is 25 characters; 128 characters for MP3/WMA tag information.

???This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files and 250 folders (999 files per folder).

???This unit cannot play back the following files:

???MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.

???MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.

???MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

Changing the source

???If you change the source, playback also stops. Next time you select the same source again, playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.

Ejecting a disc

???If the ejected disc is not removed within

15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted again into the loading slot to protect it from dust. (Disc will not play this time.)

24

General settings???PSM

??????AUTO??? setting for ???DIMMER??? may not work correctly on some vehicles, particularly on those having a control dial for dimming. In this case, change the ???DIMMER??? setting to any other than ???AUTO.???

???If you change the ???AMP GAIN??? setting from ???HIGH PWR??? to ???LOW PWR??? while the volume level is set higher than ???VOL 30,??? the unit automatically changes the volume level to ???VOL 30.???

Title assignment

???If you try to assign titles to more than 30 discs, ???NAMEFULL??? appears. Delete unwanted titles before assignment.

???Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can also be shown if you play back the disc from the unit and vice versa.

DAB tuner operations

Maintenance

How to clean the connectors

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.

iPod?? or D. player operations

???When you turn on this unit, the iPod or D. player is charged through this unit.

???While the iPod or D. player is connected, all operations from the iPod or D. player are disabled. Perform all operations from this unit.

???The text information may not be displayed correctly.

??? Some characters such as accented letters cannot be shown correctly on the display.

??? Depends on the condition of communication between the iPod or D. player and the unit.

???If the text information includes more than 8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see also page 17). This unit can display up to 40 characters.

Notice:

When operating an iPod or a D. player, some operations may not be performed correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the following JVC web site:

For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/ english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>

For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/ english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>

Connector

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the CD player in the following cases:

???After starting the heater in the car.

???If it becomes very humid inside the car. Should this occur, the CD player may malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until the moisture evaporates.

How to handle discs

???Always hold the disc by the

edges. Do not touch its recording surface.

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the disc around the center holder (with the printed surface facing up).

???Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.

Continued on the next page

25

ENGLISH

To keep discs clean

A dirty disc may not play correctly. If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to edge.

???Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean discs.

To play new discs

New discs may have some rough spots around the inner and outer edges. If such a disc is used, this unit may reject the disc.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Do not use the following discs:

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.

FM/AM General

Disc playback

MP3/WMA playback

???Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. ??? Stop playback while driving on rough roads.

???Change the disc.

???Check the cords and connections.

??? Disc cannot be played back. ??? Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.

???Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file names.

26

MP3/WMA playback

playback

ENGLISH

USB memory

??????READ??? and ???FAILED??? appear alternately on the display, then returns to the previous source.

???The attached USB memory may be malfunctioning, or may not have been formatted correctly. The files included in the USB memory are corrupted.

???Do not pull out or attach the USB memory repeatedly while ???CHECK??? appears on the display.

Continued on the next page

27

28

Specifications

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION

Maximum Power Output: Front: 50 W per channel Rear: 50 W per channel

Continuous Power Output (RMS):

Front: 19 W per channel into 4 ???, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion.

Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 ???, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion.

Load Impedance: 4 ??? (4 ??? to 8 ??? allowance) Tone Control Range:

Bass: ??10 dB at 100 Hz

Treble: ??10 dB at 10 kHz Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB

Line-Out Level/Impedance:

2.5 V/20 k??? load (full scale) Output Impedance: 1 k??? Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:

2.0 V/20 k??? load (full scale) Other Terminals:

CD changer, Steering wheel remote input

TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range:

FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

AM: (MW) 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz (LW) 144 kHz to 279 kHz

[FM Tuner]

Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 ??V/75 ???) 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

16.3 dBf (1.8 ??V/75 ???)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

Stereo Separation: 30 dB

[MW Tuner]

Sensitivity: 20 ??V

Selectivity: 35 dB

[LW Tuner]

Sensitivity: 50 ??V

CD PLAYER/USB MEMORY SECTION

Type: Compact disc player

Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)

Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit MP3 Decoding Format:

MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3 Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps

WMA (Windows Media?? Audio) Decoding Format:

Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps Playable USB memory:

Format: FAT 12/16/32

Storage: Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)

Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA

Max. Current: Less than 500 mA

GENERAL

Power Requirement: Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance) Grounding System: Negative ground Allowable Operating Temperature:

0??C to +40??C Dimensions (W ?? H ?? D):

Installation Size (approx.):

182 mm ?? 52 mm ?? 152 mm Panel Size (approx.):

188 mm ?? 58 mm ?? 11 mm Mass (approx.):

1.4 kg (excluding accessories)

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

???Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

???iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

ENGLISH

29

Having TROUBLE with operation?

Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

Haben Sie PROBLEME mit dem Betrieb?

Bitte setzen Sie Ihr Ger??t zur??ck

Siehe Seite Zur??cksetzen des Ger??ts

?????????????????????? ?????? ?????????????????????????

????????????????????, ?????????????????????????? ???????? ????????????????????

?????? ?????????????????? ???????????????????? ?? ???????????????????????? ???????????? ???????????????????? ???????????????????? ???? ?????????????????????????????? ????????????????

GET0357-013A

[EY]

KD-G722/KD-G721

Installation/Connection Manual

Einbau/Anschlu??anleitung

?????????????????????? ???? ??????????????????/??????????????????????

1205DTSMDTJEIN EN, GE, RU

?? 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited

ENGLISH

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealers.

WARNINGS

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery???s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before installing the unit.

???Be sure to ground this unit to the car???s chassis again after installation.

Notes:

???Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.

???It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 ??? to 8 ???). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change ???AMP GAIN??? setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 18 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

???To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.

???The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.

Heat sink

Abstrahlblech

????????????????

WARNUNGEN

Zur Vermeidung von Kurzschl??ssen empfehlen wir, da?? Sie den negativen Batterieanschlu?? abtrennen und alle elektrischen Anschl??sse herstellen, bevor das Ger??t eingebaut wird.

???Sicherstellen, da?? das Ger??t nach dem Einbau a Chassis des Fahrzeugs geerdet wird.

Hinweise:

???Die Sicherung mit einer der entsprechenden Nennleistung ersetzen. Brennt die Sicherung h??ufig durch, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC Autoradioh??ndler.

???Es wird empfohlen, Lautsprecher mit einer Maximalleistung von mehr als 50 W anzuschlie??en (sowohl hinten als auch vorne, mit einer Impedanz von 4 ??? bis 8 ???). Wenn die Maximalleistung weniger als 50 W betr??gt, stellen Sie ???AMP GAIN??? anders ein, um Sch??den an den Lautsprechern zu vermeiden (siehe Seite 18 der

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).

???Zur Vermeidung eines Kurzschlusses die Anschlu??klemmen der NICHT VERWENDETEN Leitungen mit Isolierklebeband umwickeln.

???Das Abstrahlblech wird nach dem Gebrauch sehr hei??. Beim Ausbau des Ger??ts darauf achten, das Abstrahlblech nicht zu ber??hren.

????????????????????????????

?????? ???????????????????????????? ???????????????? ?????????????????? ???? ?????????????????????? ?????? ?????????????????????? ?????????????????????????? ???????????? ???????????????????????? ?? ?????????????????????? ?????? ?????????????????????? ?????????? ???????????????????? ????????????????????.

????????????? ?????????????????? ?????????????????????? ?????????????????? ???????????? ???????????????????? ???? ?????????? ????????????????????.

????????????????????:

????????????????????? ???????????????????????????? ???????????? ?????????????????????????????? ???????????????????? ????????????. ???????? ???????????????????????????? ?????????????? ?????????????? ??????????, ???????????????????? ?? ???????????? ?????????????????????????? ?????????????????????? JVC.

????????????????????????????? ???????????????????? ???????????????? ?? ???????????????????????? ?????????????????? ?????????? 50 ???? (?? ???????????? ?? ???????????????? ???????????? ????????????????????, ?? ???????????? ???????????????????????????? ???? 4 ??? ???? 8 ???). ???????? ???????????????????????? ???????????????? ?????????????????? ?????????? 50 ????, ?????????????????? ?? ?????????? ???AMP GAIN???, ?????????? ?????????????????????????? ???? ?????????????????????? (????. ???????????????????? ???? ???????????????????????? ???? ??????. 18).

????????? ???????????????????????????? ?????????????????? ?????????????????? ???????????????? ???????????????????????????? ?????????? ?????????????????????? ????????????.

??????????????????? ???? ?????????? ?????????????????????????? ???????????? ??????????????????????. ???????????????????? ?????? ???? ?????????????? ???? ?????????? ???????????????? ????????????????????.

The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately.

1

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying kits.

???If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.

Die folgende Abbildung zeigt einen typischen Einbau. Bei irgendwelchen Fragen oder wenn Sie Informationen hinsichtlich des Einbausatzes brauchen, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC Autoradioh??ndler oder ein Unternehmen das diese Einbaus??tze vertreibt.

???Sind Sie sich ??ber den richtigen Einbau des Ger??ts nicht sicher, lassen Sie es von einem qualifizierten Techniker einbauen.

???? ?????????????????? ???????????????????????? ???????????????? ?????????????? ??????????????????. ???????? ?? ?????? ???????? ??????????-???????? ??????????????, ???????????????????? ??????????????????, ???????????????????? ?? ???????????? ???????????? ?????????????????????????? ?????????????????????? JVC ?????? ?? ????????????????, ???????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????.

??????????? ???? ???? ???????????? ??????????, ?????? ?????????????? ?????????????????????????? ?????? ????????????????????, ???????????????????? ?? ???????????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????.

*1 When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.

*1 Beim Aufstellen des Ger??ts darauf achten, da?? die Sicherung auf der R??ckseite nicht besch??digt wird.

*1 ???????????????????????????? ???????????????????? ?????????? ??????????????, ?????????? ???? ?????????????????? ????????????????????????????, ?????????????????????????? ??????????.

Do the required electrical connections.

Nehmen Sie die erforderlichen elektrischen

Anschl??sse vor.

?????????????????? ?????????????????????? ?????????????????????? ??????????????????, ?????? ???????????????? ???? ?????????????????? ?????????????? ???????? ????????????????????.

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the sleeve firmly in place.

Die geeigneten Zapfen biegen, um die

Manschette sicher festzuhalten.

???????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ??????????????????, ?????????????????????????????? ?????? ?????????????? ?????????????????? ??????????????.

Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated so that the unit can be removed.

Die beiden Handgriffe einsetzen und dann ziehen wie in der Abbildung gezeigt, so da?? das Ger??t entfernt werden kann.

???????????????? ?????? ??????????????, ?????????? ???????????????? ????, ?????? ???????????????? ???? ??????????????, ?????????? ???????????? ????????????????????.

When using the optional stay / Beim Verwenden der Anker-Option / ?????? ?????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????? ????????????

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Beim Einbau des Ger??ts ohne Halterung / ?????? ?????????????????? ???????????????????? ?????? ?????????????????????????? ??????????

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.

In einem Toyota-Automobil z.B. bauen Sie zuerst das Autoradio aus und installieren dann das Ger??t an seiner Stelle.

?? ???????????????????? ????????????, ????????????????, ?????????????? ?????????????????? ?????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????? ?? ???????????????????? ???????????????????? ???? ??????????.

Dashboard

Armaturenbrett

?????????????????? ????????????

Screw (option)

Schraube (Option)

???????? (??????????????????????????)

Flat type screws (M5 ??? 8 mm)*2

Senkkopfschrauben (M5 ??? 8 mm)*2

?????????????????? ?????????? (M5 ??? 8 ????)*2

Bracket*2

Konsole*2

??????????????????*2

Pocket

Taschen

Bracket*2

????????????

Konsole*2

??????????????????*2

*2 Not supplied for this unit.

*2 Wird nicht mit Ger??t mitgeliefert.

*2 H?? ???????????? ?? ???????????????? ????????????????.

Flat type screws (M5 ??? 8 mm)*2

Senkkopfschrauben (M5 ??? 8 mm)*2

?????????????????? ?????????? (M5 ??? 8 ????)*2

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30??.

Stellen Sie das Ger??t mit einem Winkel von weniger als 30?? auf.

???????????????????? ???????????????????? ?????? ?????????? ?????????? 30??.

TROUBLESHOOTING

??? The fuse blows.

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

???Power cannot be turned on.

* Is the yellow lead connected?

???No sound from the speakers.

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

??? Sound is distorted.

*Is the speaker output lead grounded?

*Are the ????????? terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

??? Noise interfere with sounds.

*Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car???s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?

??? This unit becomes hot.

*Is the speaker output lead grounded?

*Are the ????????? terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

??? This unit does not work at all.

* Have you reset your unit?

FEHLERSUCHE

??? Die Sicherung brennt durch.

* Sind die roten und schwarzen Leitungen richtig angeschlossen?

???Stromversorgung kann nicht eingeschaltet werden.

* Ist die gelbe Leitung angeschlossen?

???Kein Ton aus den Lautsprechern.

* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung kurzgeschlossen?

??? Ton verzerrt.

*Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?

*Sind die ????????? Anschlu??klemmen der linken und rechten Lautsprecher zusammen geerdet?

??? St??rger??usche im Klang.

*Ist die hintere Erdungsklemme mit k??rzeren und dickeren Kabeln an das Fahrzeugchassis angeschlossen?

??? Ger??t wird hei??.

*Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?

*Sind die ????????? Anschlu??klemmen der linken und rechten Lautsprecher zusammen geerdet?

??? Dieser Receiver funktioniert ??berhaupt nicht.

* Haben Sie einen Reset am Receiver vorgenommen?

B???????????????? ????????????????????????????

??? ???????????????? ????????????????????????????.

* ?????????????????? ???? ???????????????????? ???????????? ?? ?????????????? ???????????????

??? ?????????????? ???? ????????????????????.

* ?????????????????? ???? ???????????? ?????????????

??????????? ???? ?????????????????? ?????????? ????????????????????????????????.

* ?????? ???? ?????????????????? ?????????????????? ???? ???????????? ???????????? ???????????????????????????????????

??????????? ??????????????.

*???????????????? ???? ???????????? ???????????? ???????????????????????????????????

*?????????????????? ???? ?????????????? ????????? ?????????????? (R) ?? ???????????? (L) ???????????????????????????????????

??? ?????? ???????????? ????????????????.

*???????????????? ???? ?????????????????????? ?????????? ?????????? ???????????????????? ?? ?????????? ???????????????????? ?? ?????????????? ?????????? ?????????????????? ?? ?????????????? ?????????????

??? ???????????????????? ??????????????????????.

*???????????????? ???? ???????????? ???????????? ???????????????????????????????????

*?????????????????? ???? ?????????????? ????????? ?????????????? (R) ?? ???????????? (L) ???????????????????????????????????

??? ???????????????? ???? ????????????????.

* ?????????????????? ???? ?????????????????????????? ???????????????????

2

???Schlie??en Sie die ISO-Steckverbinder an, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt. ????????????????, ?????????????????????? ???????????????? ?????????? ???????????????????? ?????? ???????????????????????? ?????????? ??????????????, ?????? ???????????????? ???? ??????????????.

??????????????????????? ?????????????? ISO, ?????? ???????????????? ???? ??????????????.??? ?????????? ???????????????????? ?????????????????? ???????????????????? ?? ?????????????????????????????? ???????????? ???? ???????????????? ?????????????????????????? ????????????.

BConnections without using the ISO connectors / Anschl??sse ohne Verwendung der ISO-Steckverbinder / ?????????????????????? ?????? ?????????????????????????? ???????????????? ISO

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.

1 Cut the ISO connector.

2Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.

3 Connect the aerial cord.

4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

Vor dem Anschlie??en: Die Verdrahtung im Fahrzeug sorgf??ltig ??berpr??fen. Falsche Anschl??sse k??nnen ernsthafte Sch??den am Ger??t hervorrufen.

Die Leiter des Stromkabels und die Leiter des Anschlusses im Fahrzeug k??nnen sich farblich unterscheiden.

1 Schneiden Sie den ISO-Steckverbinder auf.

2Die farbigen Adern des Stromkabels in der Reihenfolge anschlie??en, wie in der Abbildung unten gezeigt.

3 Das Antennenkabel anschlie??en.

4 Die Kabelb??ume am Ger??t anschlie??en.

?????????? ?????????????? ??????????????????????: ?????????????????? ?????????????????? ???????????????? ?? ????????????????????. ???????????????????????? ?????????????????????? ?????????? ???????????????? ?? ???????????????????? ?????????????????????? ????????????????????.

???????? ???????????????? ???????????? ?? ???????? ?????????????????????? ???? ???????????? ???????????????????? ?????????? ???????? ?????????????? ??????????.

1 ???????????????? ???????????? ISO.

2???????????????????????? ?????????????? ?????????????? ?????????? ?????????????? ?? ?????????????????? ???????? ??????????????.

3 ???????????????????? ???????????? ??????????????.

4?? ?????????????????? ?????????????? ???????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ?? ????????????????????.

Aerial connector

Antennenanschluss

???????????? ??????????????

Rear ground terminal

To subwoofer (see diagram )

An Subwoofer (siehe Schaltplan )

?? ?????????????????????????????? ???????????????? (????. ?????????? )

To steering wheel remote controller (see diagram )

An Lenkradfernbedienung (siehe Schaltplan )

?? ???????????????? ???????????? ???????????????????????????? ???????????????????? (????. ?????????? )

15 A fuse

15 A Sicherung

???????????????????????????? 15 A

*1 Not supplied for this unit.

*1 Wird nicht mit Ger??t mitgeliefert.

Ignition switch

Z??ndschalter

Hintere Erdungsc- anschlu??klemme

???????????? ???????????? ????????????????????

Line out (see diagram )

Schutz kappen Signalausgang (siehe Schaltplan )

?? ???????????? (????. ?????????? )

To external components (see diagram )

An externe Komponenten (siehe Schaltplan )

?? ?????????????? ?????????????????????? (????. ?????????? )

*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.

*2 Vor der ??berpr??fung der Funktionsf??higkeit des Ger??ts vor dem Einbau, mu?? diese Leitung angeschlossen werden, da sonst die Stromversorgung nicht eingeschaltet werden kann.

*2 ?????????? ?????????????????? ???????????? ???????????????????? ???????????????????? ???????? ????????????, ?????????? ?????????????? ???? ??????????????????.

*1 ???? ???????????? ?? ???????????????? ????????????????.

Black

?????????????????????????? ??????????????????

Schwarz

????????????

Yellow*2

Gelb*2

????????????*2

Red

Rot

??????????????

Blue with white stripe

Blau mit wei??em Streifen

To metallic body or chassis of the car

Zur metallenen Karosserie oder zum Fahrwerk des Autos

?? ???????????????????????????? ?????????????? ?????? ?????????? ????????????????????

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

Zur einer stromf??hrenden Anschlu??klemme im Sicherungsblock zum Anschlie??en an die Autobatterie (Umgehen des Z??ndschalters) (konstant 12 V)

?? ?????????????? ???????? ?? ?????????? ???????????????????????????? (?????????? ???????? ??????????????????) (???????????????????? 12 ??)

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

Zur einer Zubeh??ranschlu??klemme im Sicherungsblock

?? ???????????????????????????????? ?????????????? ?? ?????????? ????????????????????????????

Fuse block

Sicherungsblock

???????? ????????????????????????????

3

Apple iPod (separately purchased)
Apple iPod (getrennt gekauft)
Apple iPod (?????????????????? ????????????????)
JVC D. player (separately purchased)
JVC D. Player (getrennt gekauft)
?????????????????????????? JVC D. (?????????????????? ????????????????)
Apple iPod

CConnecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / Anschlie??en der externen Verst??rker und/oder Subwoofer / ?????????????????????? ?????????????? ???????????????????? ??/?????? ?????????????????????????????? ????????????????

D Connecting the external components / Anschlie??en der externen Komponenten / ?????????????????????? ?????????????? ??????????????????

CD changer, DAB tuner, Apple iPod??, or JVC D. player / CD-Wechsler, DAB-Tuner, Apple iPod?? oder JVC D. Player / ???????????????????? ???????????????????????????? ?????????? ??????????????-????????????, ?????????? DAB, Apple iPod?? ?????? ?????????????????????????? JVC D.

??? Set ???CHANGER??? for the external input setting (See page 17 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Stellen Sie ???CHANGER??? f??r externe Eingangseinstellung ein (Siehe Seite 17 der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG.) / ???????????????????? ?????? ???????????????? ?????????? ???????????????? ???CHANGER??? (C??. ???????????????????? ???? ???????????????????????? ???? ??????. 17.)

You can connect these components in series as illustrated below. The iPod*6 or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)???KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).

Sie k??nnen diese Komponenten in Reihe anschlie??en, wie in der Abbildung unten gezeigt. Der iPod*6 oder D. Player kann mit einem Schnittstellenadapter angeschlossen werden (nicht mitgeliefert)???KS-PD100 (f??r iPod) oder KS-PD500 (f??r D. Player).

?????? ?????????????? ???????????????????? ?????????? ???????????????????? ??????????????????????, ?????? ???????????????? ???? ??????????????. ?????????????????????????? iPod*6 ?????? D. ?????????? ???????????????????? ?? ?????????????? ?????????????????????????? ???????????????? (???? ???????????? ?? ???????????????? ????????????????)???KS-PD100 (?????? iPod) ?????? KS-PD500 (?????? ?????????????????????????? D.).

CD changer jack / Buchse f??r CD-Wechsler /

???????????? ???????????????????? ???????????????????????????? ?????????? ??????????????-????????????

Connection 2 (alternative connection) / Anschluss 2 (alternativer Anschluss) / ???????????????????? 2 (???????????????????????????? ????????????????????)

or

oder

??????

*6 iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

*6 iPod ist ein Warenzeichen von Apple Computer, Inc., eingetragen in den USA und anderen L??ndern.

*6 iPod ???????????????? ???????????????? ???????????? Apple Computer, Inc., ???????????????????????????????????? ?? ?????? ?? ???????????? ??????????????.

*7 Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer or DAB tuner

*7 Anschlie??en des f??r CD-Wechsler oder DAB-Tuner mitgelieferten Kabels

*7 ?????????????????????? ????????????, ?????????????????? ?? ???????????????? ???????????????? ???????????????????? ???????????????????????????? ?????????? ??????????????-???????????? ?????? ???????????? DAB

Other external component / Andere externe Komponenten / ???????????? ?????????????? ????????????????????

???Set ???EXT IN??? for the external input setting (See page 17 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Stellen Sie ???EXT IN??? f??r externe Eingangseinstellung ein (Siehe Seite 17 der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG.) / ???????????????????? ?????? ???????????????? ?????????? ???????????????? ???EXT IN??? (C??. ???????????????????? ???? ???????????????????????? ???? ??????. 17.)

EConnecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Anschlu?? an die Lenkradfernbedienung / ?????????????????????? ?? ???????????????? ???????????? ???????????????????????????? ????????????????????

4

CD RECEIVER

?????????????? ?? ???????????????????????????? ??????????????-????????????

KD-G727

????CCK???? ENGLISH

?? ???????????????????????? ?? ?????????????? ???????????????????? ?????????????????? ????? ???????????? ???????? ??????????????????????????? ???????? ???????????? (????????????????) ?????????????? ???????????? ??????? ?????????????????? ???????????????? ???? ?????????? ???????????????????????? ?????????????????? ?????? ??????????, ???????????????? ??????????????????????, ?????????????????? ???????? ?????? ?????????????????? ?????? ???????????????????? ????????????? ???????????????????? ???????? (7) ?????? ???? ?????? ????????????????????????. ???????? ???????? ???????????????? ????????????????, ?? ?????????????? ???????????????? ?????????????????????? ?????????????? ???????????? ?????????? ?????????????????? ???? ???????????????????????? ?????? ?????????????? ???????????????????? ???????????????????? ???? ???????????????????????? ?????????????? ????????????, ?????????????? ?????????????????????? ????????????????????????, ???????????????????? ???????????? ?????????????????? ???????????????????? ??/?????? ?????????????????????????????? ?????????????????? ?????????????????????? ?? ???????????????????????????????????? ?????????????????? ????????????.

???????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????? ?????????????????? ?? ?????????????? ????????????, ???????????????????????? ???????????? ?? ??????, ?????????? ?????????????????? ?? ?????????????? ???????? (2) ?????? ???? ?????? ?????? ????????????????????????.

???????? ???????????? (????????????????), ?????????? ?????????? ???????????????? ???????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????? ????????????????????, ???????????????????? ?? ???????????????????? ???????? ??????????????, ???? ?????????????????????? ?????????????? ???????????? ???????? ??????????????????????, ?? ??????????????????, ???????????????????????? ?????????????????????????? JVC, ?????????????? ???? ?????????? ???????????????? ?? ???????????????????????? ?? ?????????????? ?? ???????????? ?????????????????????? ?????? ???????????? ??????????????, ?????????????????? ?? ??????.

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 7.

???????????????????? ???? ???????????? ???????????????????????? ?????????????? ?????????????? ????. ???? ??????. 7.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

???????????????? ???? ?????????????????? ?? ???????????????????? ???????????????????? ???????????????????? ?? ?????????????????? ????????????????????.

INSTRUCTIONS

???????????????????? ???? ????????????????????????

GET0358-001A

[EE]

ENGLISH

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1.CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2.CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.

3.CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.

4.REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

How to reset your unit

??? Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc

???PLEASE??? and ???EJECT??? appear alternately on the display.

???If this does not work, reset your unit.

???Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.

How to use the MODE button

If you press MODE, the unit goes into functions mode, then the number buttons and 5/??? buttons work as different function buttons.

Ex.: When number button 2 works as MO (monaural) button.

Time countdown indicator

To use these buttons for their original functions again after pressing MODE, wait for

5 seconds without pressing any of these buttons until the functions mode is cleared or press MODE again.

2

How to read this manual

???Button operations are mainly explained with the illustrations in the table below.

???Some related tips and notes are explained in ???More about this unit??? (see pages 22 ??? 25).

Press briefly.

Press repeatedly.

Press either one.

Press and hold until your desired response begins.

Press and hold both buttons at the same time.

The following marks are used to indicate...

: Built-in CD player operations.

: External CD changer operations. : External USB memory operations.

: Indicator displayed for the corresponding operation.

Warning:

If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved in a traffic accident.

Caution on volume setting:

Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.

CONTENTS

For safety...

???Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.

???Stop the car before performing any complicated operations.

Temperature inside the car...

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes normal before operating the unit.

3

Control panel

ENGLISH

Parts identification

How to detach/attach the control panel

Detaching...Attaching...

Lever

CAUTION:

The lever comes out if you pressed the 0button while the panel is detached. If this happens, push the lever back into lock position before attaching the panel.

4

Display window

ENGLISH

a Track information indicators???TAG (ID3 Tag), (track/file), (folder)

s Tuner reception indicators???ST (stereo), MO (monaural)

d RDS indicators???TP, PTY, AF, REG f Main display

g Tr (track) indicator

h LOUD (loudness) indicator

j Source display / Volume level indicator

kPlayback mode / item indicators??? RND (random), (disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)

l Tracks type indicators*???WMA, MP3 / Playback source indicators*???CH (CD changer), DISC (built-in CD player)

z EQ (equalizer) indicator

xSound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer) indicators???USER, ROCK, CLASSIC,

POPS, HIP HOP, JAZZ

???also works as the time countdown indicator and level meter during play (see page 17).

* lights up for the selected item.

Remote controller ??? RM-RK50

Aim the remote controller directly at the remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle in between.

Continued on the next page

5

Main elements and features

1 (standby/on/attenuator) button

???Turns the power on if pressed briefly or attenuates the sound when the power is on.

???Turns the power off if pressed and held. 2 5U (up) / D (down) ???buttons

???Changes the FM/AM/DAB bands with 5U.

???Changes the preset stations (or services) with D ???.

???Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA/ USB.

???While playing an MP3 disc on an MP3-compatible CD changer:

???Changes the disc if pressed briefly.

???Changes the folder if pressed and held.

???While listening to an Apple iPod?? or a JVC D. player:

???Pauses/stops or resumes playback with D ???.

???Enter the main menu with 5U. (Now 5U/D ???/2R/F 3work as the

menu selecting buttons.)*

3VOL ??? / VOL + buttons

???Adjusts the volume level. 4 SOUND button

???Selects the sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer).

5 SOURCE button

??? Selects the source.

62R (reverse) / F (forward) 3buttons

???Searches for stations (or services) if pressed briefly.

???Searches for ensembles if pressed and held.

???Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and held.

???Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.

???While listening to an iPod or a D. player (in menu selecting mode):

???Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press D ???to confirm the selection.)

???Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.

*5U : Returns to the previous menu.

D ??? : Confirms the selection.

6

Getting started

Basic operations

~ Turn on the power.

??

*You cannot select these sources if they are not ready or not connected.

!

For FM/AM tuner

For DAB tuner

??? Adjust the volume.

Volume level appears.

Volume level indicator

@Adjust the sound as you want. (See page 15.)

Basic settings

???See also ???General settings ??? PSM??? on pages 16 ??? 18.

1

2

1 Canceling the display demonstrations

Select ???DEMO,??? then ???DEMO OFF.???

2Setting the clock

Select ???CLOCK H??? (hour), then adjust the hour.

Select ???CLOCK M??? (minute), then adjust the minute.

Select ???24H/12H,??? then ???24H??? (hour) or ???12H??? (hour).

3 Finish the procedure.

To check the current clock time while the power is turned off

7

Radio operations

ENGLISH ~

??

Lights up when receiving an FM stereo broadcast with sufficient signal strength.

Selected band appears.

! Start searching for a station.

When a station is received, searching stops.

To stop searching, press the same button again.

Note:

FM1 and FM2: 87.5 MHz ??? 108.0 MHz FM3: 65.00 MHz ??? 74.00 MHz

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive

Lights up when monaural mode is activated.

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure. ???MONO OFF??? appears and the MO indicator goes off.

Storing stations in memory

You can preset six stations for each band.

FM station automatic presetting??? SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)

1Select the FM band (FM1 ??? FM3) you want to store into.

To tune in to a station manually

In step ! above...

1

2 Select a desired station frequency.

2

3

???SSM??? appears, then disappears when automatic presetting is over.

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are searched and stored automatically in the FM band.

8

Manual presetting

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number 4 of the FM1 band.

2

Listening to a preset station

1

2Select the preset station (1 ??? 6) you want.

To check the current clock time while listening to an FM (non-RDS) or AM station

??? For FM RDS stations, see page 11.

Frequency ??Clock

FM RDS operations

???Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the following)

???TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY Standby Receptions (see pages 10 and 16)

???Tracing the same programme automatically ???Network-Tracking Reception (see page 11)

???Programme Search (see page 17)

Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme

You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favorite programme by searching for a PTY code.

???To store your favorite programme types, see page 10.

??Select one of your favorite programme types.

or

Select one of the PTY codes (see page 10).

Continued on the next page

9

If there is a station broadcasting a programme of the same PTY code as you have selected, that station is tuned in.

PTY codes

NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE, SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS, OTHER M (music),

WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music), OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT

Storing your favorite programme types

You can store six favorite programme types.

Preset programme types in the number buttons (1 to 6):

1 Select a PTY code (see page 9).

2Select the preset number (1 ??? 6) you want to store into.

4 Finish the procedure.

Using the standby receptions

TA Standby Reception

TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any source other than AM.

The volume changes to the preset TA volume level if the current level is lower than the preset level (see page 17).

To activate TA Standby Reception

The TP (Traffic Programme) indicator either lights up or flashes.

???If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby Reception is activated.

???If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby Reception is not yet activated. (This occurs when you are listening to an FM station without the RDS signals required for TA Standby Reception.)

To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in to another station providing these signals. The TP indicator will stop flashing and remain lit.

To deactivate the TA Standby Reception

The TP indicator goes off.

Ex.: When ???ROCK M??? is selected

3Repeat steps 1 and 2 to store other PTY codes into other preset numbers.

PTY Standby Reception

PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch temporarily to your favorite PTY programme from any source other than AM.

To activate and select your favorite PTY code

for PTY Standby Reception, see page 16. The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.

???If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby Reception is activated.

10

???If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is not yet activated.

To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in to another station providing these signals. The PTY indicator will stop flashing and remain lit.

To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception,

select ???OFF??? for the PTY code (see page 16). The PTY indicator goes off.

Tracing the same programme??? Network-Tracking Reception

When driving in an area where FM reception is not sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to another FM RDS station of the same network, possibly broadcasting the same programme with stronger signals (see the illustration below).

When shipped from the factory, Network- Tracking Reception is activated.

To change the Network-Tracking Reception

setting, see ???AF-REG??? on page 16.

Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas (01 ??? 05)

Disc/USB memory

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.

To stop play and eject the disc

Playing discs in the CD changer

All discs in the magazine will be played repeatedly until you change the source.

??? Ejecting the magazine will also stop playback.

~

??

To check the current clock time while listening to an FM RDS station

*If you have changed the external input setting to ???EXT IN??? (see page 17), you cannot select the CD changer.

Select a disc.

For disc number from 01 ??? 06:

For disc number from 07 ??? 12:

Station name (PS) =Station Frequency =

Programme type (PTY) =Clock =(back to the

beginning)

Continued on the next page

11

USB memory

If a USB memory has been attached...

Playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.

???If a different USB memory is currently attached, playback starts from the beginning.

To eject the USB memory, straightly pull it out from the unit.

Cautions:

???Avoid using the USB memory if it might hinder your safety driving.

???Make sure all important data has been backed up to avoid losing the data.

About MP3 and WMA tracks

MP3 and WMA ???tracks??? (words ???file??? and ???track??? are used interchangeably) are recorded in ???folders.???

About the CD changer

It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.

???You can also connect MP3-incompatible CD changers. However, these units are not compatible with MP3 discs.

???You cannot use the CH-X99, CH-X100, and KD-MK series CD changers with this unit.

???You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD changer.

???Disc text information recorded in the CD Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text compatible CD changer is connected.

???For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume).

To fast-forward or reverse the track

To go to the next or previous tracks

To go to the next or previous folders (only for MP3/WMA/USB)

For MP3 tracks: For WMA tracks:

12

To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder (for MP3/ WMA/USB) directly

To select a number from 01 ??? 06:

2

Each time you press the button, you can skip 10 tracks.

???After the last track, the first track will be selected and vice versa.

ENGLISH

To select a number from 07 ??? 12:

???To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA/ USB, it is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their folder names???01, 02, 03, and so on.

To select a particular track in a folder (for MP3/WMA/USB):

Other main functions

Skipping tracks quickly during play

Only possible on JVC

MP3-compatible CD changer

???For MP3/WMA/USB, you can skip tracks within the same folder.

Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track whose number is a single digit (1 to 9)

1

3

Prohibiting disc ejection

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure.

13

ENGLISH

Changing the display information

While playing an audio CD or a CD Text

While playing an MP3/WMA*2 disc or a

USB memory

???When ???TAG DISP??? is set to ???TAG ON??? (see page 18)

??? When ???TAG DISP??? is set to ???TAG OFF???

: Elapsed playing time with the current track number

: Clock with the current track number

*1 If the current disc is an audio CD, ???NO NAME??? appears.

*2 Only for the built-in CD player and external USB memory.

*3 If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information, folder name and file name appear. In this case, the TAG indicator will not light up.

Selecting the playback modes

You can use only one of the following playback modes at a time.

1

2Select your desired playback mode.

7 Repeat play

7 Random play

*4 Only while playing a media (MP3/WMA/ USB).

*5 Only while playing discs in the CD changer.

14

Sound adjustments

You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the music genre (C-EQ: custom equalizer).

1

2

Adjusting the sound

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your preference.

1

2

Indication pattern changes as you adjust the level.

Indication, [Range]

BAS*1 (bass), [???06 to +06]

Adjust the bass.

TRE*1 (treble), [???06 to +06]

Adjust the treble.

FAD*2 (fader), [R06 to F06]

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.

BAL (balance), [L06 to R06]

Adjust the left and right speaker balance.

LOUD*1 (loudness), [LOUD ON or

LOUD OFF]

Boost low and high frequencies to produce a well-balanced sound at low volume level.

SUB.W*3 (subwoofer), [00 to 08]

Adjust the subwoofer output level.

VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50*4]

Adjust the volume.

*1 When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness, the adjustment you have made is stored for the currently selected sound mode (C-EQ) including ???USER.???

*2 If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to ???00.???

*3 This takes effect only when a subwoofer is connected.

*4 Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See page 18 for details.)

ENGLISH

Ex.: When ???TRE??? is selected

15

General settings ??? PSM

ENGLISH

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items listed in the table that follows.

1

2 Select a PSM item.

3 Adjust the PSM item selected.

4Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other PSM items if necessary.

5 Finish the procedure.

16

*1 Depends on the amplifier gain control (see page 18). *2 Displayed only when DAB tuner is connected.

*3 Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display. *4 Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected???FM, AM, CD, or USB.

Continued on the next page

ENGLISH

17

ENGLISH

Title assignment

You can assign titles to CDs (both in the unit and the CD changer). You can assign up to 30 discs and each title up to 32 characters.

???You cannot assign a title to a CD Text, an MP3/WMA disc, or a USB memory.

1Select the sources.

???For CDs in this unit: Insert a CD.

???For CDs in the CD changer: Select ???CD-CH,??? then select a disc number.

2 Enter the title assignment mode.

Ex.: When ???CD??? is selected as the source

3Assign a title.

1 Select a character.

Available characters Display indications

18

2Move to the next (or previous) character position.

3Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish entering the title.

4 Finish the procedure.

To erase the entire title

In step 2 on page 18...

iPod??/D. player operations

This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod or a JVC D. player from the control panel.

Before operating your iPod or D. player: Connect either one of the following (separately purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear of this unit.

???Interface adapter for iPod?????KS-PD100 for controlling an iPod.

???D. player interface adapter???KS-PD500 for controlling a D. player.

???For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume).

???For details, refer also to the manual supplied with the interface adapter.

Caution:

Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the vehicle???s ignition switch before connecting or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.

Playback starts automatically from where it has been paused*1 or stopped*2 previously.

! Adjust the volume.

???Adjust the sound as you want. (See page 15.)

??? Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or D. player is deactivated.

To pause*1 or stop*2 playback

To resume playback, press it again.

To fast-forward or reverse the track

To go to the next or previous tracks

*1 For iPod

*2 For D. player

19

ENGLISH

Selecting a track from the menu

1 Enter the main menu.

Now the 5/???/ 4/?? buttons work as the menu selecting buttons*3.

*3 The menu selecting mode will be canceled:

???If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.

???When you confirm the selection of a track.

2 Select the desired menu.

For iPod:

PLAYLIST ??ARTISTS ??ALBUMS ??SONGS ??GENRES ??COMPOSER ??(back to the beginning)

For D. player:

PLAYLIST ??ARTIST ??ALBUM ??GENRE

??TRACK ??(back to the beginning)

3 Confirm the selection.

To move back to the previous menu, press 5.

???If a track is selected, playback starts automatically.

???If the selected item has another layer, you will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the desired track is played.

???Holding4/??can skip 10 items at a time.

Selecting the playback modes

1

2 Select your desired playback mode.

7 Repeat play

ONE RPT

Functions the same as ???Repeat One??? of the iPod or ???Repeat Mode =One??? for the D. player.

ALL RPT

Functions the same as ???Repeat All??? of the iPod or ???Repeat Mode =All??? for the D. player.

RPT OFF

Cancels.

7 Random play

ALBM RND*

Functions the same as ???Shuffle Albums??? of the iPod.

SONG RND/RND ON

Functions the same as ???Shuffle Songs??? of the iPod or ???Random Play =On??? of the D. player.

RND OFF

Cancels.

*For iPod: Only if you select ???ALL??? in ???ALBUMS??? of the main ???MENU.???

To check other information while listening to an iPod or a D. player

Other external component operations

You can connect an external component to the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line Input Adapter???KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX Input Adapter???KS-U58 (not supplied).

???For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual (separate volume).

20

For listening to the USB memory, see pages

12 ??? 14; For iPod or D. player, see pages 19 ??? 20.

~

If ???EXT IN??? does not appear, see page 17 and select the external input (???EXT IN???).

By connecting the DAB tuner, this unit can do the following:

???Tracing the same programme automatically ???Alternative Frequency Reception (see

???DAB AF??? on page 17).

It is recommended to use DAB tuner KT-DB1000 with your unit. If you have another DAB tuner, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.

???Refer also to the Instructions supplied for your DAB tuner.

ENGLISH

??Turn on the connected component and start playing the source.

! Adjust the volume.

???Adjust the sound as you want. (See page 15.)

To check the current clock time while listening to an external component

EXT IN ??Clock

DAB tuner operations

What is DAB system?

Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB) can deliver digital quality sound without any annoying interference and signal distortion. Furthermore, it can carry text, pictures, and data. When transmitting, DAB combines several programmes (called ???services???) to form one ???ensemble.??? In addition, each ???service?????? called ???primary service??????can also be divided into its components (called ???secondary service???). A typical ensemble has six or more programmes (services) broadcast at the same time.

~

??

! Start searching for an ensemble.

When an ensemble is received, searching stops.

To stop searching, press the same button again.

???Select a service (either primary or secondary) to listen to.

To tune in to an ensemble manually

Start searching for an ensemble, as in step !

above...

1

2 Select a desired ensemble frequency.

21

Preset number flashes for a while.

???While receiving an FM RDS station:

When driving in an area where a DAB service is broadcasting the same programme as the

FM RDS station is broadcasting, this unit automatically tunes in to the DAB service.

When shipped from the factory, Alternative Frequency Reception is activated.

To deactivate the Alternative Frequency Reception, see page 17.

To change the display information while tuning to an ensemble

Service name =Ensemble name =Channel number =Frequency =Clock =(back to the beginning)

Tuning in to a preset DAB service

1

2Select the preset DAB service (primary) number (1 ??? 6) you want.

If the selected primary service has some secondary services, pressing the same button again will tune in to the secondary services.

Tracing the same programme??? Alternative Frequency Reception

You can keep listening to the same programme by activating the Alternative Frequency Reception.

???While receiving a DAB service:

When driving in an area where a service cannot be received, this unit automatically tunes in to another ensemble or FM RDS station, broadcasting the same programme.

More about this unit

Basic operations

Turning on the power

???By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.

Turning off the power

???If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc play will start from where playback has been stopped previously, next time you turn on the power.

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

???During SSM search...

???All previously stored stations are erased and stations are stored newly.

???Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).

???When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.

???When storing a station manually, the previously preset station is erased when a new station is stored in the same preset number.

22

FM RDS operations

???Network-Tracking Reception requires two types of RDS signals???PI (Programme Identification) and AF (Alternative Frequency) to work correctly. Without receiving these data correctly, Network-

Tracking Reception will not operate correctly.

???If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby Reception, the volume level automatically changes to the preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower than the preset level.

???When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated (with AF selected), Network- Tracking Reception is also activated

automatically. On the other hand, Network- Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated without deactivating Alternative Frequency Reception. (See page 16.)

???If you want to know more about RDS, visit ??http://www.rds.org.uk??.

Disc operations

Caution for DualDisc playback

???The Non-DVD side of a ???DualDisc??? does not comply with the ???Compact Disc Digital Audio??? standard. Therefore, the use of Non- DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may not be recommended.

General

???This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/ CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3, and WMA formats.

Inserting a disc

???When a disc is inserted upside down, ???PLEASE??? and ???EJECT??? appear alternately on the display. Press 0to eject the disc.

???Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into the loading slot.

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

???Use only ???finalized??? CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

???This unit can play back only files of the same type which are first detected if a disc includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/ WMA files.

???This unit can play back multi-session discs; however, unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.

???Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the following reasons:

???Discs are dirty or scratched.

???Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside the unit.

???The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

???CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with ???Packet Write??? method.

???There are improper recording conditions (missing data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched, warped, etc.).

???CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.

???Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

???Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck to the surface.

???Discs on which labels can be directly

printed by an ink jet printer.

Using these discs under high temperatures or high humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the unit.

Playing an MP3/WMA disc

???This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the letter case???upper/lower).

???This unit can show the names of albums, artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.

???This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other characters can be correctly displayed.

ENGLISH

Playing a disc

??? While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.

Continued on the next page

23

ENGLISH

???This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the conditions below:

???Bit rate: 8 kbps ??? 320 kbps

???Sampling frequency:

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1) 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)

???Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name

???The maximum number of characters for file/ folder names vary among the disc format used (includes 4 extension characters???<.mp3> or <.wma>).

???ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

???ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

???Romeo*: up to 128 (72) characters

???Joliet*: up to 64 (36) characters

???Windows long file name*: up to 128 (72) characters

*The parenthetic figure is the maximum number of characters for file/folder names in case the total number of files and folders is 313 or more.

???This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time. Especially, after performing the search function, this difference becomes noticeable.

???This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.

???This unit cannot play back the following files:

??? MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.

??? MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.

??? MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

??? WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and voice format.

??? WMA files which are not based upon Windows Media?? Audio.

??? WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

??? Files which have the data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.

???The search function works but search speed is not constant.

Playing MP3/WMA tracks from a USB memory

???While playing from a USB memory, the playback order may differ from other players.

???This unit may be unable to play back some USB memories due to their characteristics or recording conditions.

???Depending on the shape of the USB memories and connection ports, some USB memories may not be attached properly or the connection might be loose.

???It is not recommended to use a USB memory wider than 20 mm as it will block you from pressing the 0 button.

???If the connected USB memory does not have the correct files, ???NO FILES??? appears and the unit returns to the previous source.

???This unit can show Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.

???This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the conditions below:

???Bit rate:

MP3: 32 kbps ??? 320 kbps (MPEG-1)

8 kbps ??? 160 kbps (MPEG-2/2.5) WMA:5 kbps ??? 320 kbps

???Sampling frequency:

MP3: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (MPEG-1) 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (MPEG-2) 12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz (MPEG-2.5)

WMA:8 kHz ??? 48 kHz

???This unit can play back MP3 files recorded in VBR (variable bit rate).

???The maximum number of characters for folder and file names is 25 characters; 128 characters for MP3/WMA tag information.

???This unit can recognize a total of 2 500 files and 250 folders (999 files per folder).

???This unit cannot play back the following files:

???MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.

???MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.

???MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

Changing the source

???If you change the source, playback also stops. Next time you select the same source again, playback starts from where it has been stopped previously.

Ejecting a disc

???If the ejected disc is not removed within

15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted again into the loading slot to protect it from dust. (Disc will not play this time.)

24

General settings???PSM

??????AUTO??? setting for ???DIMMER??? may not work correctly on some vehicles, particularly on those having a control dial for dimming. In this case, change the ???DIMMER??? setting to any other than ???AUTO.???

???If you change the ???AMP GAIN??? setting from ???HIGH PWR??? to ???LOW PWR??? while the volume level is set higher than ???VOL 30,??? the unit automatically changes the volume level to ???VOL 30.???

Title assignment

???If you try to assign titles to more than 30 discs, ???NAMEFULL??? appears. Delete unwanted titles before assignment.

???Titles assigned to discs in the CD changer can also be shown if you play back the disc from the unit and vice versa.

DAB tuner operations

Maintenance

How to clean the connectors

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.

iPod?? or D. player operations

???When you turn on this unit, the iPod or D. player is charged through this unit.

???While the iPod or D. player is connected, all operations from the iPod or D. player are disabled. Perform all operations from this unit.

???The text information may not be displayed correctly.

??? Some characters such as accented letters cannot be shown correctly on the display.

??? Depends on the condition of communication between the iPod or D. player and the unit.

???If the text information includes more than 8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see also page 17). This unit can display up to 40 characters.

Notice:

When operating an iPod or a D. player, some operations may not be performed correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the following JVC web site:

For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/ english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>

For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/ english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>

Connector

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the CD player in the following cases:

???After starting the heater in the car.

???If it becomes very humid inside the car. Should this occur, the CD player may malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until the moisture evaporates.

How to handle discs

???Always hold the disc by the

edges. Do not touch its recording surface.

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the disc around the center holder (with the printed surface facing up).

???Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.

Continued on the next page

25

ENGLISH

To keep discs clean

A dirty disc may not play correctly. If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to edge.

???Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean discs.

To play new discs

New discs may have some rough spots around the inner and outer edges. If such a disc is used, this unit may reject the disc.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Do not use the following discs:

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.

FM/AM General

Disc playback

MP3/WMA playback

???Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. ??? Stop playback while driving on rough roads.

???Change the disc.

???Check the cords and connections.

??? Disc cannot be played back. ??? Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.

???Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file names.

26

MP3/WMA playback

playback

ENGLISH

USB memory

??????READ??? and ???FAILED??? appear alternately on the display, then returns to the previous source.

???The attached USB memory may be malfunctioning, or may not have been formatted correctly. The files included in the USB memory are corrupted.

???Do not pull out or attach the USB memory repeatedly while ???CHECK??? appears on the display.

Continued on the next page

27

28

Specifications

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION

Maximum Power Output: Front: 50 W per channel Rear: 50 W per channel

Continuous Power Output (RMS):

Front: 19 W per channel into 4 ???, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion.

Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 ???, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion.

Load Impedance: 4 ??? (4 ??? to 8 ??? allowance) Tone Control Range:

Bass: ??10 dB at 100 Hz

Treble: ??10 dB at 10 kHz Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB

Line-Out Level/Impedance:

2.5 V/20 k??? load (full scale) Output Impedance: 1 k??? Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:

2.0 V/20 k??? load (full scale) Other Terminal: CD changer

TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range:

[FM Tuner]

Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 ??V/75 ???) 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

16.3 dBf (1.8 ??V/75 ???)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

Stereo Separation: 30 dB

[MW Tuner]

Sensitivity: 20 ??V

Selectivity: 35 dB

[LW Tuner]

Sensitivity: 50 ??V

CD PLAYER/USB MEMORY SECTION

Type: Compact disc player

Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup (semiconductor laser)

Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit MP3 Decoding Format:

MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3 Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps

WMA (Windows Media?? Audio) Decoding Format:

Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps Playable USB memory:

Format: FAT 12/16/32

Storage: Less than 4 GB (1 partition type)

Playable Audio Format: MP3/WMA

Max. Current: Less than 500 mA

GENERAL

Power Requirement: Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance) Grounding System: Negative ground Allowable Operating Temperature:

0??C to +40??C Dimensions (W ?? H ?? D):

Installation Size (approx.):

182 mm ?? 52 mm ?? 152 mm Panel Size (approx.):

188 mm ?? 58 mm ?? 11 mm Mass (approx.):

1.4 kg (excluding accessories)

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

???Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

???iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

ENGLISH

29

Having TROUBLE with operation?

Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

?????????????????????? ?????? ?????????????????????????

????????????????????, ?????????????????????????? ???????? ????????????????????

?????? ?????????????????? ???????????????????? ?? ???????????????????????? ???????????? ???????????????????? ???????????????????? ???? ?????????????????????????????? ????????????????

KD-G727

Installation/Connection Manual

?????????????????????? ???? ??????????????????/??????????????????????

ENGLISH

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealers.

??????????????

?????? ???????????????????? ?????????????????????? ?????? ???????????????????????? ???? 12 ?? ?????????????????????? ???????????????????? ?? ?????????????? ???? ??????????. ???????? ?????? ???????????????????? ???? ?????????? ???????? ??????????????, ?????????????????? ???????????????? ????????????????????, ?????????????? ?????????? ???????? ???????????????????? ?? ???????????? ?????????????????????????? ?????????????????????? JVC.

Heat sink

????????????????

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:

???DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.

???BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.

?????????????????????????????? ???? ?????????????? ?? ?????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????:

??????? ?????????????????????? ?????????????? ?????????????????????????????????? ?? ???????????????????????? ????????????????????, ?????????? ???????????????????? ?????????? ????????????????????.

????????????? ???????????????????????? ???????????????? ?????????????????????????????????? ?? ???????????? ?????????????? ???????????????????????????????? ?????????????????? ?????????? ???????????????????? ?????????????????????????????????? ?? ?????????? ????????????????????.

1

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying kits.

??? If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.

*1 When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.

*1 ???????????????????????????? ???????????????????? ?????????? ??????????????, ?????????? ???? ?????????????????? ????????????????????????????, ?????????????????????????? ??????????.

???? ?????????????????? ???????????????????????? ???????????????? ?????????????? ??????????????????. ???????? ?? ?????? ???????? ??????????-???????? ??????????????, ???????????????????? ??????????????????, ???????????????????? ?? ???????????? ???????????? ?????????????????????????? ?????????????????????? JVC ?????? ?? ????????????????, ???????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????.

??????????? ???? ???? ???????????? ??????????, ?????? ?????????????? ?????????????????????????? ?????? ????????????????????, ???????????????????? ?? ???????????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????.

Do the required electrical connections.

?????????????????? ?????????????????????? ?????????????????????? ??????????????????, ?????? ???????????????? ???? ?????????????????? ?????????????? ???????? ????????????????????.

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the sleeve firmly in place.

???????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ??????????????????, ?????????????????????????????? ?????? ?????????????? ?????????????????? ??????????????.

Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated so that the unit can be removed.

???????????????? ?????? ??????????????, ?????????? ???????????????? ????, ?????? ???????????????? ???? ??????????????, ?????????? ???????????? ????????????????????.

When using the optional stay / ?????? ?????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????? ????????????

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / ?????? ?????????????????? ???????????????????? ?????? ?????????????????????????? ??????????

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.

?? ?????????????????????? ???Toyota???, ????????????????, ?????????????? ?????????????? ?????????????????????????? ??????????????????, ?????????? ???????????????????? ???? ???? ??????????

Dashboard

?????????????????? ????????????

Screw (option)

???????? (??????????????????????????)

?????? ????????????????????.

Flat type screws (M5 ??? 8 mm)*2

?????????????????? ?????????? (M5 ??? 8 ????)*2

Bracket*2

?????????????????? *2

*2 Not supplied for this unit.

*2 ???? ???????????? ?? ????????????????.

Flat type screws (M5 ??? 8 mm)*2

?????????????????? ?????????? (M5 ??? 8 ????)*2

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30??.

???????????????????? ???????????????????? ?????? ?????????? ?????????? 30??.

???????????????????? : ?????? ?????????????????? ???????????????????? ???? ?????????????????? ??????????????????, ?????????????????????? ???????????? ?????????? ???????????? 8 ????. ?????? ?????????????????????????? ?????????? ?????????????? ???????????? ?????????? ?????????????????? ????????????????????.

TROUBLESHOOTING

??? The fuse blows.

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

???Power cannot be turned on.

* Is the yellow lead connected?

???No sound from the speakers.

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

??? Sound is distorted.

*Is the speaker output lead grounded?

*Are the ????????? terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

??? Noise interfere with sounds.

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car???s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?

??? This unit becomes hot.

*Is the speaker output lead grounded?

*Are the ????????? terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

??? This unit does not work at all.

* Have you reset your unit?

B???????????????? ????????????????????????????

??? ???????????????? ????????????????????????????.

* ?????????????????? ???? ???????????????????? ???????????? ?? ?????????????? ???????????????

??? ?????????????? ???? ????????????????????.

* ?????????????????? ???? ???????????? ?????????????

??? ???????? ???? ?????????????????? ?????????? ????????????????????????????????.

* ?????? ???? ?????????????????? ?????????????????? ???? ???????????? ???????????? ???????????????????????????????????

??? ???????? ??????????????.

*???????????????? ???? ???????????? ???????????? ???????????????????????????????????

*?????????????????? ???? ?????????????? ????????? ?????????????? (R) ?? ???????????? (L) ???????????????????????????????????

??? ?????? ???????????? ????????????????.

*???????????????? ???? ?????????????????????? ?????????? ?????????? ???????????????????? ?? ?????????? ???????????????????? ?? ?????????????? ?????????? ?????????????????? ?? ?????????????? ?????????????

??? ???????????????????? ??????????????????????.

*???????????????? ???? ???????????? ???????????? ???????????????????????????????????

*?????????????????? ???? ?????????????? ????????? ?????????????? (R) ?? ???????????? (L) ???????????????????????????????????

??? ???????????????? ???? ????????????????.

* ?????????????????? ???? ?????????????????????????? ???????????????????

2

AIf your car is equipped with the ISO connector / ???????? ???????????????????? ?????????????? ???????????????? ISO

???Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.

??????????????????????? ?????????????? ISO, ?????? ???????????????? ???? ??????????????.

From the car body

???? ?????????????? ????????????????????

ISO connector of the supplied power cord

???????????? ISO ?????????? ??????????????, ?????????????????? ?? ???????????????? ????????????????

View from the lead side

?????? ???? ?????????????? ??????????????

For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile / ?????? ?????????????????? ?????????????????????? VW/Audi ?????? Opel (Vauxhall)

You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.

??? Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.

????????????????, ?????????????????????? ???????????????? ?????????? ???????????????????? ?????? ???????????????????????? ?????????? ??????????????, ?????? ???????????????? ???? ??????????????.

??? ?????????? ???????????????????? ?????????????????? ???????????????????? ?? ?????????????????????????????? ???????????? ???? ???????????????? ?????????????????????????? ????????????.

ISO connector

???????????? ISO

Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.

???????? ???????????????? ???? ????????????????????, ?????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ?????????? ???????????????????? 2.

Modified wiring 2 / ?????????????????????????????? ?????????? ???????????????????? 2

B Connections without using the ISO connectors / ?????????????????????? ?????? ?????????????????????????? ???????????????? ISO

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.

1 Cut the ISO connector.

2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.

3 Connect the aerial cord.

4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

?????????? ?????????????? ??????????????????????: ?????????????????? ?????????????????? ???????????????? ?? ????????????????????. ???????????????????????? ?????????????????????? ?????????? ???????????????? ?? ???????????????????? ?????????????????????? ????????????????????.

???????? ???????????????? ???????????? ?? ???????? ?????????????????????? ???? ???????????? ???????????????????? ?????????? ???????? ?????????????? ??????????.

1 ???????????????? ???????????? ISO.

2 ???????????????????????? ?????????????? ?????????????? ?????????? ?????????????? ?? ?????????????????? ???????? ??????????????.

3 ???????????????????? ???????????? ??????????????.

4 ?? ?????????????????? ?????????????? ???????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ?? ????????????????????.

To subwoofer (see diagram )

?? ???????????????????????????? ?????????????? (????. ?????????? )

Aerial connector

????????????

??????????????

15 A fuse

???????????????????????????? 15 A

Rear ground terminal

???????????? ???????????? ????????????????????

Line out (see diagram )

?? ???????????? (????. ?????????? )

Black

????????????

*1 Not supplied for this unit.

*1 ???? ???????????? ?? ????????????????

To metallic body or chassis of the car

?? ???????????????????????????? ?????????????? ?????? ?????????? ????????????????????

Ignition switch

?????????????????????????? ??????????????????

To external components (see diagram )

?? ?????????????? ?????????????????????? (????. ?????????? )

*2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.

*2 ?????????? ?????????????????? ???????????? ???????????????????? ???????????????????? ???????? ????????????, ?????????? ?????????????? ???? ??????????????????.

Red

??????????????

Blue with white stripe

?????????? ?? ?????????? ??????????????

Orange with white stripe

?????????????????? ?? ?????????? ??????????????

Brown

????????????????????

Fuse block

???????? ????????????????????????????

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

?? ???????????????????????????????? ?????????????? ?? ?????????? ????????????????????????????

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)

?? ???????????????????? ?????????????? ?????????????? ???????????????????????? ?????? ?????????????? (????????. 200 ????)

To car light control switch

?? ???????????????????????? ?????????????????????????? ?????????????????? ????????????????????

To cellular phone system

?? ?????????????? ???????????????? ????????????????

3

C Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer / ?????????????????????? ?????????????? ???????????????????? ??/?????? ???????????????????????????? ??????????????

You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.

???Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through this unit.

???Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.

?????????? ???????????????????? ?????????????????? ?????? ???????????????????? ?????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????.

??????????????????????????? ???????????? ???????????????? ???????????????????? (?????????? ?? ?????????? ??????????????) ?? ?????????????? ???????????????? ???????????????????? ?????????????? ???????????????????????? ??????, ?????????? ???? ?????????? ???????? ?????????????????? ?? ?????????? ????????????????????.

????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????? ???? ?????????????? ????????????????????, ???????????????????? ???? ?? ??????????????????. ???????????????? ?????????????? ?????????????????????????????????? ?????????????? ???????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????.

Rear speakers

????????????

????????????????????????????????

JVC Amplifier

JVC-??????????????????

Front speakers

????????????????

????????????????????????????????

JVC Amplifier

JVC-??????????????????

D Connecting the external components / ?????????????????????? ?????????????? ??????????????????

CD changer, DAB tuner, Apple iPod??, or JVC D. player / ???????????????????? ???????????????????????????? ?????????? ??????????????-????????????, ?????????? DAB, ?????????????????????????? Apple iPod?? ?????? JVC D.

??? Set ???CHANGER??? for the external input setting (See page 17 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / ???????????????????? ?????? ???????????????? ?????????? ???????????????? ???CHANGER??? (C??. ???????????????????? ???? ???????????????????????? ???? ??????. 17.)

You can connect these components in series as illustrated below. The iPod*6 or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)???KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).

?????? ?????????????? ???????????????????? ?????????? ???????????????????? ??????????????????????, ?????? ???????????????? ???? ??????????????. ?????????????????????????? iPod*6 ?????? D. ?????????? ???????????????????? ?? ?????????????? ?????????????????????????? ???????????????? (???? ???????????? ?? ???????????????? ????????????????)???KS-PD100 (?????? iPod) ?????? KS-PD500 (?????? ?????????????????????????? D.).

Connection 2 (alternative connection) / ???????????????????? 2 (???????????????????????????? ????????????????????)

CAUTION / ??????????????????????????????:

???Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.

????????????? ???????????????????????? ???????????????????? ???????????????????????????? ?????????? ??????????????-????????????, ?????? ???????????????? ????????????????.

CD changer jack

???????????? ???????????????????? ???????????????????????????? ?????????? ??????????????-????????????

Apple iPod (separately purchased)

Apple iPod (?????????????????? ????????????????)

??????????????????????????

???????????????????? ??????????????-???????????? JVC

*6 iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

*6 iPod ???????????????? ???????????????????????????? Apple Computer, Inc., ???????????????????????????????????? ?? ?????? ?? ???????????? ??????????????.

*7 Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer or DAB tuner

*7 ?????????????????????? ????????????, ?????????????????? ?? ???????????????? ???????????????? ???????????????????? ???????????????????????????? ?????????? ??????????????-???????????? ?????? ???????????? DAB

Other external component / ???????????? ?????????????? ????????????????????

??? Set ???EXT IN??? for the external input setting (See page 17 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / ???????????????????? ?????? ???????????????? ?????????? ???????????????? ???EXT IN??? (C??. ???????????????????? ???? ???????????????????????? ???? ??????. 17.)

CD changer jack

???????????? ???????????????????? ???????????????????????????? ?????????? ??????????????-????????????

External component

?????????????? ????????????????????

3.5 mm stereo mini plug

????????-???????????? ????????????-3,5

External component

?????????????? ????????????????????

*8 Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)

*8 ???????????????????????????????? ?????????????? KS-U57 (???? ???????????? ?? ???????????????? ????????????????)

*9 AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)

*9 ?????????????? ?????? ?????????????????????? ???????????????????????????? ?????????????????? KS-U58 (???? ???????????? ?? ???????????????? ????????????????)

4